You are on page 1of 274

SERVICE MANUAL

433HCMC & 533HCMC


STEAM STERILIZERS

Getinge USA, Inc.


1777 East Henrietta Road
Rochester, New York 14623-3133 USA
Phone: (800) 950-9912
Facsimile: (800) 950-2570
SERVICE MANUAL 61301609701
Rev. A (2/11/05)
Rev. B (11/30/06) Solenoid valve orientation changed; covers updated

Related Publications:

Manual Publication No.

Installation Instructions 61301609699

400HC/500HC Operator 61301608208


Manual

433HCMC & 533HCMC 61301609700


Operator Manual
Addendum

Parts Catalog 61301609702

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS & NOTES IN MANUAL

The following symbols with related notes appear in this manual.

“Warning” notes alert the user to the possibility of personal injury.


WARNING

“Caution” notes alert the user to the possibility of damage to the equipment.
CAUTION

“Notes” alert the user to pertinent facts and conditions.


NOTE

NOTE This manual contains proprietary information of Getinge USA, Inc. It shall
not be reproduced in whole or in part without the written permission of
Getinge USA, Inc.

Copyright ©2006 by Getinge USA, Inc.

ii
Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS ON THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . ix


Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .x
DESCRIPTION OF ICONS USED IN THIS MANUAL . . . . . . xi
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

Section 1 General Information


INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
STERILIZER OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
Opening and Closing the Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
Running a Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
Fault and Failure Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
Aborting a Cycle (Manual Abort) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
Advancing a Cycle Phase (Manual Phase Advance). 1–11
CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
Door Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
Loading Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
Password Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
CYCLE TYPES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
Gravity Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
Flash 3+ Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
Flash 10+ Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
Liquids Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
Prevacuum Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
Leak Test Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

Section 2 Diagnostic Messages


INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
Failure Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
Fault Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
Informational Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND CORRECTIVE
ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
INFORMATIONAL MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14

61301609701 iii
Section 3 Trouble Analysis
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
TROUBLE ANALYSIS TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
Viewing the Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
Viewing the Analog and Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Operating the Digital Outputs Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
Viewing the System and User Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
TROUBLE ANALYSIS TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
Printer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14

Section 4 Calibration and Adjustments


INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
General Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
Calibrating the Pressure Transducer (In Situ Method) 4–8
Calibrating the Pressure Transducer (Using Test
Fixture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
Calibrating the Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
Verification Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
STERILIZER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
Setting Up the Door Configuration and Sterilizer
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
Enabling the Sterilizer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27
CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–28
Pressure Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–28
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display . . . . . . . . . . . 4–32
Adjusting the Secondary Alarm Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . 4–32
PIPING SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33
Needle Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33
Hand-Operated Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–34
DOOR ADJUSTMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–35
Door Counterbalance Weight Adjustment . . . . . . . . . 4–36
Door Catch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37
Door Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–38
Door Guide Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–38
Door Cover Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39
Door Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39
SPECIAL TOOLS—SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
Pressure Meter—Standard For PSIA Test Meter . . . 4–40
Temperature Test Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41

iv
Section 5 Maintenance and Repair
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE—STANDARD . . 5–2
CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR . . . . 5–3
Replacing the Temperature Sensors (RTDs). . . . . . . . 5–3
Replacing the Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
Replacing the Flash EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
PIPING SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR . . . . . . 5–23
Check the Pressure Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–23
Clean the Water and Steam Strainers . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–23
Clean the Water Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–23
Replace the Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–24
DOOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25
Opening the Door Manually (Manual Gasket Retract) 5–25
Door Gasket Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–27
Replace And Adjust the Door Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–30
Replacing the Door Spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31

Section 6 Optional Equipment & Features


INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
UTILITIES CONTROL FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
Setting the Utilities Control ON and OFF Times . . . . . 6–3
Bypassing Utility Shutdown Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
PARAMETER CHECK FEATURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
Estimating Valid Cycle Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
WATER-SAVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11

Section 7 Service Menu


INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
What You Can Do From the Display Panel . . . . . . . . . 7–2
NAVIGATION BASICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Selecting an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Entering a Password (or Alphanumeric Value) . . . . . . 7–5
Entering a Data Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
Selecting a Setup Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
Exiting a Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
SETUP SOFTKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
Selecting the Process Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
Accessing the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
Viewing the About Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
SELECT CYCLE SOFTKEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14

61301609701 v
Selecting a Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
PARAMETER SOFTKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
Editing the Cycle Parameters (Quick Edit Mode) . . . 7–15
Editing the Cycle Parameters (Full Edit Mode) . . . . . 7–17
SYSTEM MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
TIME SETTINGS MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
Setting the Clock and Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
Setting the Alarm Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
CALIBRATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
Calibrating the Temperature Sensors and Pressure
Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
Entering the Bridge Compensation Table Data . . . . . 7–26
DOCUMENTATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
Printing a Program Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
Setting Up the Printer Log Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
SettingUp the Printer Log Values Definition . . . . . . . 7–30
CONFIGURATION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
Changing the Cycle Name and Number . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
Assigning the Sterilizer Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
Selecting the Language, Date Format, and Units . . . 7–36
Setting Up the Display Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
PASSWORDS MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
Configuring Password Access for Individual Users . . 7–40
DIPSWITCHES MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
SERVICE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
Viewing the Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
Viewing the Analog and Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
Operating the Digital Ouptuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
Viewing the User and System Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
Testing the Printer and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
SAVE RAM TO FLASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52

Section 8 Piping Schematics


PIPING COMPONENTS, 433HCMC & 533HCMC . . . . . . . 8–2
INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM, 433HCMC &
533HCMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
PROCESS DIAGRAM, 433HCMC & 533HCMC . . . . . . . . . 8–4
WATER SAVER PACKAGE, MP-129A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8
PIPING DIAGRAM, MP-129F WATER-SAVER . . . . . . . . . . 8–9

Section 9 Electrical Schematics


WIRING DIAGRAM, SYSTEM, 400/500 HCMC . . . . . . . . . 9–2
WIRING DIAGRAM, POWER BOX 1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3

vi
WIRING DIAGRAM, CONTROL BOX 2A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9–4
WIRING DIAGRAM, OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . .9–5
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, 433HCMC & 533HCMC . . . . .9–6
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, POWER BOX 1A . . . . . . . . . .9–7
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, CONTROL OUTPUT . . . . . . .9–8
WIRING DIAGRAM, MP-129A WATER-SAVER . . . . . . . .9–10
WIRING DIAGRAM, MP-129F WATER SAVER . . . . . . . .9–11

Section 10 Roughing-In Drawings


M/C 3522 STEAM STERILIZER, SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–2
M/C 3522 STEAM STERILIZER, DD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–4
M/C 3533 STEAM STERILIZER, SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–6
M/C 3533 STEAM STERILIZER, DD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–8
SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 3500 (16” x 16”) . . . . . . . .10–10
SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 3500 (20” x 20”) . . . . . . . .10–14
WATER SAVER PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10–18

Appendix A System and User Flags


SYSTEM FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
USER FLAGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–5

Index

61301609701 vii
viii
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Switches
Open Door — Unseals the Door

Close Door — Seals the Door

Clear Alarm
!

Start

Directional Arrows (for navigating display screens)

Enter

Up Arrows (for selecting softkey options (i.e. Save, Cancel, OK, and so
forth)

Indicators
Door(s) Closed

Door(s) Sealed

In Process

Process Complete

Process Failure
!

61301609701 ix
Labels The following label on the sterilizer alerts personnel to possible hazards:

Hot Surfaces

BURN HAZARD: Hot surfaces or heat-emitting area. Avoid contact. Risk of


HS
burns.

WARNING — BURN HAZARD


Steam released from the sterilizer chamber can
cause serious burns
Stand away while opening the door

If water leaks from the front of the sterilizer,


DO NOT open the door (see Operator Manual)
Contact Getinge USA Customer Support (800)950-9912
MGA 61301602908 REV A

WARNING: Processing a type of load other than defined in Operator’s


WARNING
Manual could be hazardous.
Processing a type
of load other
than defined in
Operator's Manual
could be hazardous.

MGA III 61301609118 REV A

The following labels on the Control Box and Power Box alert service
personnel to possible hazards:.

High Voltage

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not remove cover. Refer
servicing to qualified service personnel.

Attention

Refer to accompanying documents for further information.

Electrostatic Sensitive Devices

OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS
FOR HANDLING

SENSITIVE
DEVICES

x
DESCRIPTION OF ICONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

SERVICE This procedure requires a password. See page 1-14 for a list of password
access areas.

ACCESS REQUIRED

61301609701 xi
Manual Conventions Before you begin using this manual, it is important to understand the
conventions used. These conventions are established for visual ease of use.

Warnings alert the user to the possibility of personal injury.


WARNING

Cautions alert the user to the possibility of damage to the equipment.


CAUTION

Notes alert the user to pertinent facts and conditions.


NOTE

ITALIC CAPS Display text, such as the ENTER PASSWORD prompt.

[ALL CAPS] Softkeys on the control panel, such as [MORE] or [OK].

ALL CAPS Switches and indicators on the control panel, such as ENTER.

> The > symbol leads you through nested menu items and dialog box options
to a final action. For example: SYSTEM MENU > enter password >
CONFIGURATION > EDIT CYCLES.

Italic Upper/Lower Case Cross-reference to another manual or guide, such as see EDIT CYCLE
PARMAMETERS on page 7-15.

xii
Section 1 General Information

INTRODUCTION

This section includes the following information:


• Models — general description and factory settings for the 400/500
HCMC Series sterilizers.
• Sterilizer Operation — instructions for operating the sterilizer.
• Configurations — chamber sizes, door configurations, loading
equipment, and password access.
• 400/500 HCMC Cycle Types — cycle phase diagrams and description of
parameters.

The 433HCMC and 533HCMC Vacuum Steam Sterilizers are intended for
use by health care facilities and to be used to sterilizer wrapped and
unwrapped surgical instruments, linens, and liquids (liquids not intended for
patient contact) by means of pressurized steam.

Six cycle types are available: Prevacuum, Gravity, Flash 3+, Flash 10+,
Liquids, and Leak Test. The factory set parameters are listed in Table 1–1.
The cycle parameters can be adjusted by a user with parameter password
access (see page 1–14).

Gravity cycles are intended for wrapped goods, while the Flash 3+ cycle is
intended for unwrapped non-porous items and the Flash 10+ cycle for
unwrapped porous and/or non-porous items.

For Prevacuum cycles (and Leak Test), pressure/vacuum pulsing is used to


condition a load prior to processing at the selected exposure time and
temperature. All other cycles use the gravity (downward displacement)
method of air removal.

NOTES
• See “CYCLE TYPES” on page 1–15 for cycle details.
• Refer to the Load Chart in the Operator Manual for load composition and
maximum number of items.
• Gravity cycles include five conditioning pulses; Flash 10+ cycles, two
pulses.
• The PREVAC 3 cycle may be used to process unwrapped porous and
non-porous items.
• Vacuum leak test cycle parameters are not adjustable.

61301609701 1–1
General Information

Table 1–1. Model 433HCMC & 533HCMC Factory Set Parameters

CYCLE FACTORY SET PARAMETERS

Exposure Drying Time


No. Prefix Name Exposure Time
Temperature (or Cooldown Rate)

P1 vac PREVAC1 275.0°F (135.0°C) 3 minutes 16 minutes


P2
P3

P4 PREVAC2 275.0°F (135.0°C) 3 minutes 3 minutes


P5

P6 PREVAC3 275.0°F (135.0°C) 3 minutes 0 minutes

P7 B-D TEST 273.0°F (134.0°C) 3 minutes, 30 seconds 0 minutes


(03:30)

P8 grv GRAVITY1 250.0°F (121.1°C) 30 minutes 30 minutes


P9
P10

P11 GRAVITY 2 250.0°F (121.1°C) 10 minutes 30 minutes


P12
P13

P14 f3 FLASH 3+ 275.0°F (135.0°C) 3 minutes 30 seconds (00:00:30)


P15
P16
P17

P18 f10 FLASH 10+ 275.0°F (135.0°C) 10 minutes 30 seconds (00:00:30)


P19

P20 liq LIQUIDS1 250.0°F (121.1°C) 30 minutes Cooldown Rate:


0.75 psi/minute

P21 liq LIQUIDS2 250.0°F (121.1°C) 45 minutes Cooldown Rate:


0.75 psi/minute

P22 lkt LEAKTEST 268.0°F (131.0°C) 3 minutes 15 min. dry + 5 min.


dwell + 15 min. test

1–2
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

STERILIZER OPERATION

The following is an operational summary for the sterilizer. Refer to the


Operator Manual for detailed instructions.

NOTE
Refer to Section 7, “Service Menu” for an in-depth description of the user
interface.

Figure 1–1. 400/500 HCMC SERIES STEAM STERILIZER

CONTROLS
ON / OFF

A09701-M

61301609701 1–3
General Information

Controls and Indicators The sterilizer controls and indicators are shown in Figure 1–2.

Figure 1–2. OPERATOR PANEL

8 6

5
7 CONTROLS

1
ON / OFF
!

4
!
2

9 3 WS-0047A

1. CONTROLS OFF/ON Switch


2. Cycle Switches
3. Programming Switches
4. Door Control Switches
5. Status Indicators
6. Display Window
7. Printer
8. Jacket Pressure Gauge
9. Chamber Pressure Gauge

1–4
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

(1) CONTROLS OFF/ON SWITCH


CONTROLS
OFF ON
Turns the sterilizer controls ON or OFF. The switch is illuminated when the
controls are ON.

WS-0091

• If the switch is illuminated but the display screen is blank, the controls are
NOTES
in screensaver (sleep) mode. Press any button on the control panel to
wake up the controls.
• The CONTROLS OFF/ON switch does not turn off 115 VAC power to the
sterilizer. To remove all power, turn OFF the sterilizer at the mains
disconnect switch.
• If the controls are accidentally turned OFF, press CONTROLS OFF/ON
immediately to turn the controls back ON. The cycle will not be aborted if
the controls are turned back ON within 60 seconds.

(2) CYCLE SWITCHES


• START — Starts the selected processing cycle.

• CLEAR/ALARM — Clears display messages and silences any alarm.


!
(3) PROGRAMMING SWITCHES
• UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT arrows — Used to enter a password, change
cycle parameters, and navigate the menu tree.

• ENTER — Enables/stores selections in memory.

• UP ARROW softkey — Usage varies depending on the cycle and/or


cycle phase. The selection name appears above the arrow.

(4) DOOR CONTROL SWITCHES


• CLOSE DOOR — Seals the door.

• OPEN DOOR — Unseals the door.

61301609701 1–5
General Information

(5) STATUS INDICATORS


• DOOR(S) CLOSED — Indicates the door is closed, but not sealed (or
both doors are closed but not sealed on a double door unit).
• DOOR(S) SEALED — Indicates the door is sealed.

• IN PROCESS — Indicates a cycle in progress.

• PROCESS COMPLETE —Green light indicates a cycle is complete;


Red light indicates an aborted cycle.

• PROCESS FAILURE — Indicates that the controls automatically


! aborted a cycle due to a process failure or equipment malfunction.

(6) DISPLAY WINDOW

During normal operation, one of three process screens is displayed:


DETAILS, PLOT GRAPH, or BAR GRAPH. To change the process screen,
see “Selecting the Process Screen” on page 7–10.

Figure 1–3. BAR GRAPH DISPLAY

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA

37.3 C 14.68 PSI

0
REMAINING TIME

SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL


CYCLE METER
WS-0014

• Press [SETUP] to access the setup and service menus. See “SETUP
SOFTKEY” on page 7–9 for a detailed description.
• Press [SELECT CYCLE] to access the cycle list. See “SELECT CYCLE
SOFTKEY” on page 7–14 for a detailed description.
• Press [PARAMETER] to view and change the cycle parameter settings.
See “PARAMETER SOFTKEY” on page 7–15 for a detailed description.
• Press [UNSEAL] to unseal the door.

1–6
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

(7) PRINTER

Printer components are shown in Figure 1–4. Refer to the Operator Manual
for a detailed description of the printer.

Figure 1–4. PRINTER

Roll
Cover Status
STATUS

Lever Copy

Feed
Retainer

Shaft

Clear
Cover

Tab
00-01A
Cover Slot
Slot Notch
Core

(8) JACKET PRESSURE GAUGE

The JACKET gauge indicates the jacket pressure in PSI.

(9) CHAMBER PRESSURE GAUGE

The CHAMBER gauge indicates the chamber pressure in PSI or chamber


vacuum in mm/Hg.

61301609701 1–7
General Information

Opening and Closing the To open the door:


Door
1. The door automatically unseals at the end of a good cycle
(CYCLE COMPLETE light is green).
2. Apply gentle downward pressure on the door handle.

Figure 1–5. DOOR OPERATION

To close the door:


1. Apply gentle upward pressure on the handle. The door will
latch when fully closed.
2. The door automatically seals when START is pressed.

1–8
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Running a Cycle 1. Select the cycle:


SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL
CYCLE METER
WS-0339

a. Press [SELECT CYCLE] to view the cycle list.


b. Use the arrow keys and ENTER to select the cycle
from the list.
2. Change the cycle settings if desired.

SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL


CYCLE METER
WS-0340

See “Editing the Cycle Parameters (Quick Edit Mode)” on


page 7–15 or “Editing the Cycle Parameters (Full Edit
Mode)” on page 7–17.
3. Load the sterilizer and close the door.
4. Run the cycle.
a. Press START.

b. IN PROCESS lights during the cycle.

c. PROCESS COMPLETE lights green when a good


cycle is completed.
5. Open the door and remove the load.

61301609701 1–9
General Information

Fault and Failure Conditions If a fault or failure condition occurs, PROCESS FAILURE lights and an
alarm sounds. A diagnostic message will be displayed and printed out. See
Section 2, “Diagnostic Messages” for a description of the condition and
corrective actions.
Press CLEAR/ALARM to silence the alarm.
!

RISK OF NON-STERILE DEVICE: If a cycle is aborted, either


WARNING
automatically due to a failure condition or manually by the
operator, the PROCESS COMPLETE light will be red. The
cycle must be considered incomplete and the load must be
reprocessed (unwrapped goods or liquids) or repacked and
reprocessed (wrapped goods).

Aborting a Cycle (Manual DURING A UNTIMED PHASE


Abort)
To manually abort a cycle:
1. Press [ABORT].
SETUP PARA- ABORT
METER
WS-0344B

2. Press OPEN DOOR to unseal the door.

DURING A TIMED PHASE

To manually abort a cycle:


1. Press [MORE], then

SETUP PARA- MORE


METER
WS-0344

2. Press [ABORT].

ABORT PHS ADV EXIT

WS-0342

3. Press OPEN DOOR to unseal the door.

1–10
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Advancing a Cycle Phase This feature may be used to terminate a timed phase and advance to the
(Manual Phase Advance) next phase. Timed phases include PURGE, LIQ DWELL, EXPOSURE, LIQ
EXPOSURE, DRYING, EQUALIZATION, and LEAK TEST.

RISK OF CONTAMINATION or NON-STERILE DEVICE: If the


WARNING
cycle advance feature is used, the cycle must be considered
incomplete and the load must be repackaged and reprocessed.

NOTE
The cycle advance feature is intended for use by qualified service personnel
only. Improper use of this feature can compromise the integrity of the
processing cycle.

To advance a cycle:
1. Press [MORE], then
SETUP PARA- MORE
METER
WS-0344

2. Press [PHS ADV].

ABORT PHS ADV EXIT

WS-0343

The CYCLE ADVANCED message displays for 5 seconds and is printed out.

After a cycle phase is advanced, the cycle continues through the air-in
phase but the controls enter STANDBY mode, bypassing the CYCLE
COMPLETE phase.

To unseal the door and remove the load, press UNSEAL while the controls
are in standby mode.

NOTE
If the phase is manually advanced, it may be necessary to manually retract
the gasket in order to open the door. See “Opening the Door Manually
(Manual Gasket Retract)” on page 5–25.

61301609701 1–11
General Information

CONFIGURATIONS

Door Configurations All models may be either a single door or a double door unit.

SINGLE DOOR OPERATION


1. The operator loads the sterilizer and closes the door.
The DOOR(S) CLOSED indicator lights when the door is in the closed
position.
2. The operator presses the START button.
The door automatically seals and the DOOR(S) SEALED indicator
lights. A pressure switch activates, closing the interlock that supplies
power to the Steam to Chamber valve SV1.
3. When a good cycle is completed, the door automatically unseals and
the DOOR(S) SEALED indicator goes off.

NOTE
The door will not unseal if the pressure in the chamber is not within 2 PSI of
atmospheric pressure.

4. The operator opens the door and unloads the sterilizer.

DOUBLE DOOR OPERATION

• Abbreviations used for the doors in the text, drawings, and diagnostic
NOTES
messages are as follows:
• CE = Control End — The end of the unit where most programming and
settings occur during use; usually the “load end” of a double door unit.
The printer is at this end.
• RE= Remote End — Usually the “unload end” of a double door unit.

1. The operator loads the sterilizer and closes the door.


The DOOR(S) CLOSED indicator lights when both doors are in the
closed position.
2. The operator presses the START button and both doors seal
automatically.
The DOOR(S) SEALED indicator lights when both doors are in the
sealed position. A pressure switch activates, closing the interlock that
supplies power to Steam to Chamber valve SV1.
3. When the cycle completes, both doors automatically unseal and the
DOOR(S) SEALED indicator goes off.
4. The operator opens the door and removes the load.

1–12
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Loading Equipment 400HCMC Series units (16" x 16" chamber) are equipped with a rack and
extendible shelves.

500HCMC Series units (20" x 20" chamber) are either equipped with a rack
and extendible shelves or furnished with a track assembly designed to
accommodate a loading car and transfer carriage.

61301609701 1–13
General Information

Password Access The password system is designed to allow individual users to have various
levels of access privileges as listed in Table 1–2.

Table 1–2. Password Access Areas

ACCESS AREA PROCEDURES SEE PAGE

A Parameter Settings Edit the Cycle Parameters (Quick Edit Mode) 7-15
Edit the Cycle Parameters (Full Edit Mode) 7-17

B Calendar Set the Clock and Calendar 7-21


Set the Alarm Clock 7-22

C Calibration Calibrate the Pressure Transducer 4-8


Calibrate the Temperature Sensors 4-17
Enter the Bridge Compensation Table Data 5-8

D Boolean Password Engineering Use Only —

E Service View the Error Log 3-3


View the Analog and Digital Inputs 3-5
Operate the Digital Outputs Manually 3-7
View the System and User Flags 3-10
Test the Printer and LEDs 7-50
SAVE RAM TO FLASH 7-51

F Dipswitches Set Up the Door Configuration 4-26


Select the Sterilizer Model 4-26
Enable the Utility Control Feature 4-27

G Configuration Change the Cycle Name and Number 7-31


Assign the Sterilizer Name 7-32
Select the Language, Date Format, and Units 7-34
Set Up the Display Panel 7-36
Save RAM to the EPROM 7-51

H System Definition Engineering Use Only

I Boolean Code Engineering Use Only —

J Password Setup Configure the Password Access for Individual Users 7-39

K Documentation Print a Program Listing 7-26


Set Up the Printer Log Interval 7-27
Set Up the Printer Log Values Definition 7-28

1–14
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

CYCLE TYPES

Gravity Cycles Gravity cycles use the gravity (downward displacement) method of air
removal. The Conditioning phase of these cycles includes pressure pulses
to aid in air removal.

Refer to Figure 1–6 for the adjustable parameters and their maximum,
minimum, and factory settings.

Figure 1–6. GRAVITY CYCLES


Pressure

Exposure
Temp

Drying
Time Dry 1=vac, 2=grav
Atmospheric
Gravity Dry

Exposure
Time Time
Vacuum Dry

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Cycle Name Gravity Cycle


Cycle Phases: Cycle No. P Range Resolution Factory Setting

1 Cycle Start

2 Purge

3 Conditioning
Gravity 1 Gravity 2
4 Heat-up
Exposure Time 00:01:00 – 06:00:00 1 sec. 00:30:00 00:10:00
5 Exposure Exposure Temp 230.0 – 275.0˚F 0.1˚F (0.1˚C) 250.0˚F 275.0˚F
(110.0 – 135.0˚C)
6 Exhaust
Drying Time 00:00:10 – 12:00:00 1 sec. 00:30:00 00:30:00
7 Drying
Dry 1=vac, 2=grav 1=VAC 2=GRAV 00001 – 00002 1 00002 00002
8 Air-in

9 Cycle Complete
WS-0160 A

DRYING METHOD

If the load is not vacuum-sensitive, Vacuum drying may be selected to


reduce the time required to thoroughly dry the load.

61301609701 1–15
General Information

DRYING RECOMMENDATIONS

The actual drying time and load size may need to be adjusted based on a
variety of conditions including:
• load composition
• wrapping technique
• ambient conditions
• quality of utilities

Proper loading techniques must be observed to ensure proper air circulation


around the load.

Flash 3+ Cycle Flash 3+ cycles use the gravity (downward displacement) method of air
removal. The Conditioning phase of these cycles does not include pressure
pulses to aid in air removal.

Refer to Figure 1–7 for the adjustable parameters and their maximum,
minimum, and factory settings.

Figure 1–7. FLASH 3+ CYCLE

Exposure
Temp
Pressure

Drying
Time Dry 1=vac,2=grav
Gravity Dry
Atmospheric
Exposure
Time Vacuum Dry
Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Flash 3+ Cycle — HC Models


Cycle Name
Cycle Phases:
Cycle No. P Range Resolution Factory Setting
1 Cycle Start

2 Purge

3 Conditioning

4 Heat-up

5 Exposure Exposure Time 00:03:00 – 06:00:00 1 sec. 00:03:00


Exposure Temp 230.0 – 275.0˚F 0.1˚F (0.1˚C) 275.0˚F
6 Exhaust (110.0 – 135.0˚C)

7 Drying Drying Time 00:00:10 – 12:00:00 1 sec. 00:00:10


Dry 1=vac,2=grav 1=VAC 2=GRAV 00001 – 00002 1 00002
8 Air-in

9 Cycle Complete
WS-0161 A

1–16
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Flash 10+ Cycle Flash 10+ cycles use the gravity (downward displacement) method of air
removal. The Conditioning phase of these cycles includes two pressure
pulses to aid in air removal.

Refer to Figure 1–8 for the adjustable parameters and their maximum,
minimum, and factory settings.

Figure 1–8. FLASH 10+ CYCLE

Exposure
Temp
Pressure

Drying
Time Dry 1=vac, 2=grav
Gravity Dry
Atmospheric
Exposure
Time Vacuum Dry
Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Flash 10+ Cycle — HC Models


Cycle Name
CYCLE PHASES:
Cycle No. P Range Resolution Factory Setting
1 Cycle Start

2 Purge

3 Conditioning

4 Heat-up

5 Exposure Exposure Time 00:10:00 – 06:00:00 1 sec. 00:10:00


Exposure Temp 230.0 – 275.0˚F 0.1˚F (0.1˚C) 275.0˚F
6 Exhaust (110.0 – 135.0˚C)

7 Drying Drying Time 00:00:10 – 12:00:00 1 sec. 00:00:10

Air-in Dry 1=vac, 2=grav 1=VAC 2=GRAV 00001 – 00002 1 00002


8

9 Cycle Complete

WS-0162 A

61301609701 1–17
General Information

• The Liquids cycle is not intended for the sterilization of liquids


WARNINGS intended for direct patient contact.
• POSSIBILITY OF INJURY: Use of sealed unvented
containers to process liquids is NOT recommended. Use of
such containers may result in containers breaking and
possible personal injury.

Liquids Cycle Liquids cycles use the gravity method of air removal. The cooldown rate
during the Liquid Exhaust phase is computer-controlled.

Refer to Figure 1–9 for the adjustable parameters and their maximum,
minimum, and factory settings.

Figure 1–9. LIQUIDS CYCLE


Chamber
Exposure Temp Cooldown
Pressure

Atmospheric

Exposure Time
Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Liquids Cycle — HC Models


Cycle Name
Cycle Phases:
Cycle No. P Range Resolution Factory Setting
1 Cycle Start

2 Purge

3 Heat-up
Liquids 1 Liquids 2
4 Liquid Dwell 00:00:00 – 00:30:00 1 sec. 00:08:00 00:08:00
5 Liquid Exposure 219.0 – 275.0˚F
Exposure Temp 0.1 250.0 250.0
(104.0 – 135.0˚C)
Exposure Time 00:01:00 – 06:00:00 1 sec. 00:30:00 00:45:00
6 Liquid Exhaust
Chamber Cooldown 0.00 – 5.00 PSIA/min. 0.01 0.75 0.75
7 Air-in
8 Cycle Complete
WS-0163 A

1–18
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Prevacuum Cycles Prevacuum cycles use pressure/vacuum pulses to remove air from the load
during the Conditioning phase. During the drying phase, vacuum in the
chamber reduces the time required to dry the load.

Refer to Figure 1–10 for the adjustable parameters and their maximum,
minimum, and factory settings.

Figure 1–10. PREVACUUM CYCLE

Exposure
Temp
Pressure

Atmospheric
Exposure
Drying
Time
Time
Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Prevac Cycle — HC Models


CYCLE PHASES: Cycle Name

1 Cycle Start Cycle No. P Range Resolution Factory Setting

2 Purge

3 Conditioning

4 Heat-up Prevac 1 Prevac 2 Prevac 3 B-D Test


Exposure Time 00:01:00 – 06:00:00 1 sec. 00:03:00 00:03:00 00:03:00 00:03:30
5 Exposure 230.0 – 275.0˚F
Exposure Temp 0.1˚F (0.1˚C) 275.0˚F 275.0˚F 275.0˚F 273.0˚F
(110.0 – 135.0˚C)
6 Exhaust

7 Drying
Drying Time 00:00:00 – 12:00:00 1 sec. 00:16:00 00:03:00 00:00:00 00:00:00
8 Air-in
9 Cycle Complete

WS-0164 A

DRYING RECOMMENDATIONS

The actual drying time and load size may need to be adjusted based on a
variety of conditions including:
• load composition
• wrapping technique
• ambient conditions
• quality of utilities

Proper loading techniques must be observed to ensure proper air circulation


around the load.

61301609701 1–19
General Information

Leak Test Cycle The Vacuum Leak Test cycle parameters are not adjustable.

Refer to Figure 1–11 for maximum, minimum, and factory settings.

Pressure Figure 1–11. LEAK TEST CYCLE

Atmospheric

Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Cycle Name LEAK TEST Leak Test Cycle — HC Models


Cycle Phases:
Cycle No. P Range Resolution Factory Setting
1 Cycle Start
2 Purge
3 Conditioning

4 Heat-up

5 Exposure Exposure Time 00:03:00

6 Exhaust Exposure Temp 268.0˚F

7 Drying Dry Time 00:15:00


8 Equalization Dwell Time 00:05:00

9 Leak Test Test Time 00:15:00

10 Air-in
11 Cycle Complete
WS-0165 A

1–20
Section 2 Diagnostic Messages

INTRODUCTION

The sterilizer software has a built-in diagnostic feature that generates a


diagnostic message when a malfunction or out-of-tolerance condition
occurs.

Diagnostic messages are grouped into three categories:


• failure conditions (see Table 2–1 on page 2–3)
• fault conditions (see Table 2–1 on page 2–3)
• informational messages (see Table 2–2 on page 2–14)

Failure Conditions Failure conditions are indicated by a flashing Process Failure light and
pulsing alarm tone (exceptions are noted in diagnostic message table).
Failure messages appear in the lower left of the display screen and are
highlighted in red (see Figure 2–1). When a failure occurs, the controls
automatically cancel the cycle.

Figure 2–1. FAILURE MESSAGE

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:30:14


02 HEAT-UP 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA

48.1 C 14.37 PSI

66
REMAINING TIME

JACKET OVER TEMP


SETUP ABORT

ws-0043

Fault Conditions Fault conditions are less severe than a process failure and are indicated by
a steady alarm tone (exceptions are noted in diagnostic message table).
Fault messages appear in the lower left of the display screen and are
highlighted in red. The sterilizer is usually able to complete the cycle if a
fault occurs.

61301609701 2–1
Diagnostic Messages

Informational Messages Informational messages alert the operator to pertinent conditions.


Informational messages appear in the lower right of the display screen and
are highlighted in blue (see Figure 2–2). The message clears automatically
when the condition is corrected.

Figure 2–2. INFORMATIONAL MESSAGE

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

grvGRAVITY1
P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:30:14
00:30:14
01
02 CYCLE
HEAT-UPSTART 00:00:05
00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA

48.1 C 14.37 PSI

66
REMAINING TIME

WAIT FOR JACKET


SETUP PARA- ABORT
METER

ws-0044

2–2
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

Each diagnostic message table presented in this section describes the


problem and the possible corrective actions, in the following format:

DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE (as displayed on Control Panel)

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Explanation of the failure or fault condi- Level 1 troubleshooting: These procedures should be performed before check-
tion. ing piping or electrical components.

(Type of alarm) Level 2 troubleshooting: These procedures involve checking piping or electrical
components and cleaning, repairing, or replacing them as necessary.

When a failure or fault condition occurs, the PROCESS FAILURE indicator


! flashes and an alarm sounds. Failure and fault messages are also printed
out and added to the error log.

To clear the message and silence the alarm, press the CLEAR/
!
ALARM switch.

Table 2–1 is a list of the diagnostic messages by type.

Table 2–1. Diagnostic Messages


00:30:00
Exposure Time
121.1 C
Exposure Temp
00:30:00
Drying Time DISPLAY MESSAGE TYPE PAGE
P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:30:14
02 HEAT-UP 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA


ABORT-AIR REMOVAL Failure 2-5
48.1 C
ABORT-DOOR SW 2-5
14.37 PSI
ABORT-EXH SLOWED 2-5
ABORT-HEAT-UP
66
REMAINING TIME ABORT-HIGH TEMP
2-6
2-6
JACKET OVER TEMP ABORT-LIQexh SLOW 2-6
SETUP ABORT
ABORT-SLOW STEAM 2-7
ws-0043

AIR-IN SLOW Fault* 2-7

BATTERY LOW Fault 2-7

CE NOT SEALED Fault 2-8


CE NOT UNSEALED 2-8

CHAM RTD ERROR Failure 2-8

CHECK BCT VALUES Fault 2-9

61301609701 2–3
Diagnostic Messages

Table 2–1. Diagnostic Messages

DISPLAY MESSAGE TYPE PAGE

DI 00-07 COM ERR Failure 2-9


DI 08-15 COM ERR 2-9
DO 00-07 COM ERR 2-9
DO 08-15 COM ERR 2-10
DO 16-23 COM ERR 2-10

DOOR SWITCH FAIL Fault 2-10

DOORS NOT SEALED Fault 2-10


DOORS NOT UNSLD 2-11

JACKET OVER-TEMP Failure 2-11

JKT RTD ERROR Failure 2-11

LEAK TEST FAIL Fault 2-12

POWER FAILED Failure 2-12

PRESS ERROR Failure 2-12

PRESS IN CHAMBER Fault 2-13

RESET-TEMP LOW Fault 2-13

WATER IN DRAIN Fault ** 2-13

* Failure if the sterilizer can’t complete the cycle.


** Failure if the condition occurs during the cycle.

2–4
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

ABORT-AIR REMOVAL

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Negative pulse subphase exceeded 30 Check the following:


minutes. • Water supply turned on?
• Water supply pressure adequate (30 to 60 psig dynamic)?
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT • Door gasket damaged?
(pulsing alarm) • Chamber drain sediment screen clogged?
• Water supply strainer clogged?

If the problem persists, proceed as follows:


• Clean or replace ejector.
• Clean or repair Steam to Chamber valve 1SV.
• Clean or repair Chamber Drain valve 2SV.
• Clean or repair Air-In valve 3SV.
• Clean or repair Water to Ejector valve 6SV.
• Check for loose pipe fittings.
• Check Chamber Pressure transducer 1PT.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U.

ABORT-DOOR SW

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Door sealed or door closed input lost Proceed as follows:


during cycle. • Check and adjust door limit switches. Replace if necessary.
• Check and adjust pressure switches. Replace if necessary.
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT • Check CM1 Board 2A2U.
(pulsing alarm)

ABORT-EXH SLOWED

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Exhaust time exceeded 30 minutes Check the following:


during non-liquid cycle. • Chamber drain screen clogged?
• Water supply pressure adequate (30 to 60 psig dynamic)?
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT • Door gasket damaged?
(pulsing alarm)
If problem persists, proceed as follows:
• Clean or repair Steam to Chamber valve 1SV.
• Clean or repair Chamber Drain valve 2SV.
• Check Chamber Pressure transducer 1PT.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U.

61301609701 2–5
Diagnostic Messages

ABORT-HEAT-UP

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Heat-up time exceeded: Check the following:


• 60 minutes (non-liquid cycle). • Steam supply turned on?
• 90 minutes (liquid cycles). • Steam supply adequate (40 to 50 psig dynamic)?
• Steam supply strainer clogged?
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT • Oversized load?
(pulsing alarm)
If problem persists, proceed as follows:
• Clean or repair Steam to Chamber valve 1SV.
• Clean or repair Chamber Drain valve 2SV.
• Clean or repair Jacket Steam valve 8SV.
• Check Chamber RTD 1RT.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U.

ABORT-HIGH TEMP

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Temperature during the purge phase Proceed as follows:


exceeded the set point plus 18.0°F • Clean or repair Steam to Chamber valve 1SV.
(10°C) for 1 second; during other • Check gasket for leak into chamber.
phases, temperature exceeded the set • Check Chamber Drain valve 2SV and/or Water to Ejector valve 6SV.
point plus 7.2°F (4°C) for 1 second. • Clean or repair Jacket Steam valve 8SV.
• Check Chamber Drain RTD 1RT.
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT • Check CM1 Board 2A2U.
(pulsing alarm)

ABORT-LIQexh SLOW

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Liquid exhaust phase exceeded 4 Check the following:


hours. • Chamber drain screen clogged?
• Water supply pressure adequate (30 to 60 psig dynamic)?
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT • Door gasket damaged?
(pulsing alarm)
If problem persists, proceed as follows:
• Clean or repair Steam to Chamber valve 1SV.
• Clean or repair Chamber Drain valve 2SV.
• Check Chamber Pressure transducer 1PT.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U.

2–6
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

ABORT-SLOW STEAM

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Positive pulse subphase exceeded 30 Check the following:


minutes. • Steam turned on?
• Steam supply pressure adequate (40 to 50 psig dynamic)?
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT • Steam supply strainer clogged?
(pulsing alarm)
If the problem persists, proceed as follows:
• Clean or repair Steam to Chamber valve 1SV.
• Clean or repair Chamber Drain valve 2SV.
• Clean or repair Jacket Steam valve 8SV.
• Clean or repair jacket steam trap 1ST.
• Adjust door switch (or replace if defective).
• Check Jacket RTD 2RT.
• Check Chamber Pressure transducer 1PT.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U.

AIR-IN SLOW

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Air-in phase exceeded 30 minutes. Replace the air-in filter.

PROCESS FAILURE — Auto Abort if


sterilizer cannot complete the cycle.
(pulsing alarm)

BATTERY LOW

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Low battery. Replace CPU Board 2A1U.

61301609701 2–7
Diagnostic Messages

CE NOT SEALED

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Control end door did not seal before Check the door gasket and replace if damaged.
door seal timer expired (12 sec.).
Digital input DI 02 CE (RE) Sealed is If the problem persists, proceed as follows:
OFF. • Check chamber pressure switch 4S.
• Check CM1 PC Board 2A2U.
• Clean or replace Door Seal valve 10SV.
• Steam supply or strainer clogged.

CE NOT UNSEALED

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Control end door did not unseal before Proceed as follows:


door unseal timer expired (30 sec.) • Reset the control system: (1) turn the power OFF, (2) wait 60 seconds, then
Digital input CE (RE) Sealed is ON. (3) turn the power ON again.
• Check the door gasket. Replace if necessary.
(steady alarm)
If the problem persists:
• Check chamber pressure switch 4S.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U.
• Clean or replace Door Vacuum valve 12SV.

CHAM RTD ERROR

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Chamber temperature analog input not Proceed as follows:


found by process control module. • Check Chamber RTD 1RT.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U.
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT
(pulsing alarm)

2–8
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

CHECK BCT VALUES

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

During standby, the chamber pressure Compare the values on the BRIDGE COMPENSATION screen
exceeded 72.5 PSI (the highest value (Figure 7–24 on page 7–26) with the values on the pressure transducer
the transducer can read) and a data card (Figure 5–2 on page 5–5). Enter the correct values as
PRESS ERROR did not occur. necessary.

(pulsing alarm) If the problem persists:


• Check pressure transducer 1PT.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U.

DI 00-07 COM ERR

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Digital input module has lost communi- Proceed as follows:


cation with process control module. • Check CM1 Board 2A2U
• Check CPU Board 2A1U
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT
(pulsing alarm)

DI 08-15 COM ERR

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Digital input module has lost communi- Proceed as follows:


cation with process control module. • Check CM1 Board 2A2U
• Check CPU Board 2A1U
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT
(pulsing alarm)

DO 00-07 COM ERR

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Digital output module has lost commu- Proceed as follows:


nication with process control module. • Check CM1 Board 2A2U
• Check CPU Board 2A1U
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT
(pulsing alarm)

61301609701 2–9
Diagnostic Messages

DO 08-15 COM ERR

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Digital output module has lost commu- Proceed as follows:


nication with process control module. • Check CM1 Board 2A2U
• Check CPU Board 2A1U
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT
(pulsing alarm)

DO 16-23 COM ERR

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Digital output module has lost commu- Proceed as follows:


nication with process control module. • Check CM1 Board 2A2U
• Check CPU Board 2A1U
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT
(pulsing alarm)

DOOR SWITCH FAIL

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

• CE Sealed input present without CE Check for obstruction.


Closed while in Standby.
• RE sealed input present without RE If the problem persists, proceed as follows:
Closed while in Standby. • Check and replace door switch.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U.
(steady alarm)

DOORS NOT SEALED

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Doors did not seal before door seal Check the door gasket and replace it if damaged.
timer expired (12 sec.).
If the problem persists, proceed as follows:
Digital input DI 02 CE (RE) Sealed is • Check pressure switch 4S.
OFF. • Check CM1 Board 2A2U.
• Check Display Panel 5A.
(steady alarm) • Check Door Seal valve 10SV (standard double door) or 11SV (unidirectional
doors).

2–10
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

DOORS NOT UNSLD

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Doors did not unseal before door Proceed as follows:


unseal timer expired (30 sec). • Reset the control system: (1) turn the power OFF, (2) wait 60 seconds, then
(3) turn the power ON again.
Digital input CE (RE) Sealed is ON. • Check the door gasket. Replace if necessary.

(steady alarm) If the problem persists:


• Check pressure switch 4S.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U.
• Check Display Panel 5A.
• Check Door Vacuum valve 12SV (standard double door) or 13SV (unidirec-
tional doors).

JACKET OVER-TEMP

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Jacket temperature exceeded 139.4°C Proceed as follows:


(282.9°F). • Clean or repair Jacket Steam valve 8SV.
• Clean or rebuild jacket steam trap 1ST.
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT • Check Jacket RTD 2RT.
(pulsing alarm) • Check CM1 Board 2A2U.

JKT RTD ERROR

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Jacket temperature analog input not Proceed as follows:


found by process control module • Check Jacket RTD 2RT.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U.
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT
(pulsing alarm)

61301609701 2–11
Diagnostic Messages

LEAK TEST FAIL

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

433/533HCMC: The unit failed the vac- Clean or replace the door gasket.
uum leak test.
If the problem persists, proceed as follows:
Possible reasons for failure: • Clean or repair Steam to Chamber valve 1SV.
• Leak rate greater than 0.78 psi/15 • Clean or repair Air-In valve 3SV.
minute (40.34 mm Hg/min). • Clean or repair chamber drain check valve(s) 2CV and 5CV.
• Chamber pressure at end of test • Check Chamber Pressure transducer 1PT.
exceeded 4.75 psi. • Check CM1 Board 2A2U.

(pulsing alarm)

POWER FAILED

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Power was interrupted for more than 60 No action required.


seconds while in cycle.

PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT


(pulsing alarm)

PRESS ERROR

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Chamber pressure analog input not Proceed as follows:


found by process control module. • Check Chamber Pressure transducer 1PT.
• Check CM1 Board 2A2U
PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT
(pulsing alarm)

2–12
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

PRESS IN CHAMBER

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Chamber pressure not within 2 psi of Proceed as follows:


atmospheric pressure while in standby • Check the manual pressure gauge to verify chamber pressure.
mode. • Reset the controls: (1) turn the power OFF, (2) wait 60 seconds, then (3) turn
the power ON again.
Controls will automatically clear fault • When the READY message is displayed, attempt to unseal the door.
when chamber pressure is within 2 psi.

(steady alarm)

RESET-TEMP LOW

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Temperature during exposure phase Proceed as follows:


fell below the set point. • Steam supply turned on?
• Steam supply adequate (40 to 50 psig dynamic)?
The cycle is reset to Heat-Up phase. • Chamber drain screen clogged?
• Check/replace steam trap.
(steady alarm)

HOT WATER: If a WATER IN DRAIN message is displayed,


WARNING
DO NOT open the chamber door manually. Hot water in the
chamber may spill out if the door is opened. Wait until the
message clears before attempting to open the door.

WATER IN DRAIN
PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

The drain float switch detected water in Proceed as follows:


the chamber drain (contacts opened for • Check or replace traps.
11 seconds). • Clean or repair chamber drain check valve 5CV.
• Check steam supply is at 40-50 psig and 97% saturated steam.
Door cannot be unsealed. Fault will • Repair or replace chamber drain float switch 1LS.
clear automatically when water has • Check CM1 Board 2A2U.
drained.

PROCESS FAILURE — AUTO ABORT


(pulsing alarm)

61301609701 2–13
Diagnostic Messages

INFORMATIONAL MESSAGES

Table 2–2 is a list of the informational messages.

Table 2–2. Informational Messages


00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
DISPLAY MESSAGE PAGE
grvGRAVITY1
P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:30:14
00:30:14
01
02 CYCLE
HEAT-UPSTART 00:00:05
00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA ABORT MANUAL 2-14


48.1 C 14.37 PSI
CE DOOR OPEN 2-14

66
REMAINING TIME
CYCLE ADVANCED 2-15
WAIT FOR JACKET
SETUP PARA-
METER
ABORT ENTER TO EDIT 2-15
ws-0044

LOW CYCLE VALUES 2-15

LOW POWER BROWN OUT 2-15

MANUAL MODE 2-16

RE DOOR OPEN 2-16

UTILITY SHUTDOWN 2-16

WAIT FOR JACKET 2-16

ABORT MANUAL

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Operator aborted the cycle by pressing Message will clear automatically when the abort sequence is completed.
the [ABORT] softkey.

CE DOOR OPEN

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Operator pressed START with the con- Message will clear when door is closed.
trol end door was opened.

2–14
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

CYCLE ADVANCED

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Operator pressed [PHS ADV] softkey to Message will clear when cycle has advanced through all the phases.
manually advance the cycle.

ENTER TO EDIT

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Operator selected cycle parameters Message on for 5 seconds after a cycle with low cycle values is saved.
that were below the parameter check
limit. Correct by adjusting the exposure time or temperature.

LOW CYCLE VALUES

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Settings for selected cycle are below Select a cycle with settings that are equal to or above the default factory
the parameter check limit. settings.

The LOW CYCLE VALUES message Message will clear when a cycle that meets the parameter check limit is
does not prevent the cycle from being selected or when START is pressed.
started.

LOW POWER BROWN OUT

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Printer message. Occasionally, with the introduction of AC power to the sterilizer, the
message "LOW POWER BROWN OUT" may occur on the printout. This
message should be disregarded.

61301609701 2–15
Diagnostic Messages

MANUAL MODE

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

One or more digital outputs are set to Check that all outputs on the TEST DIGITAL OUT screen are set to
manual mode. AUTO (See “Operating the Digital Outputs Manually” on page 3–7).

RE DOOR OPEN

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

Operator pressed START with the Message will clear when door is closed.
remote end door was opened.

UTILITY SHUTDOWN

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

The sterilizer is in Utility Shutdown Message will clear when the Utilities On alarm clock setting is activated.
mode.
Utility Shutdown mode can be bypassed to run one cycle (see “Bypassing Utility
Shutdown Mode” on page 6–4).

WAIT FOR JACKET

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION

The jacket is heating up or cooling Message will clear when the jacket reaches the temperature required to run the
down. cycle.

2–16
Section 3 Trouble Analysis

SHOCK HAZARD: This product uses relay outputs with R-C


WARNING
suppressors that in the OFF state will leak current through the
relay contact. SHUT OFF POWER BEFORE SERVICING ANY
COMPONENT WIRED TO THE OUTPUTS. The leakage
current will result in a shock hazard when the lead wire is
removed from the load.

INTRODUCTION

This section includes the following topics:


• Trouble analysis tools that are built into the control software.
• Trouble analysis charts for conditions that do not result in a diagnostic
message.

NOTE
Trouble analysis information for optional equipment is in Section 6, Optional
Equipment & Features.

Service Data Refer to the following engineering drawings as necessary:


• Piping Schematics (see Section 8)
• Electrical Schematics (see Section 9)
• Roughing-in Drawings (see Section 10)

Descriptions of the system and user flags may be found in the Appendix.

61301609701 3–1
Trouble Analysis

TROUBLE ANALYSIS TOOLS

The SERVICE menu includes several diagnostic screens that allow service
technicians to monitor the status of the sterilizer control system:
• ERROR LOG — displays error (diagnostic) messages in chronological
order and provides details about individual error conditions.
• TEST ANALOG IN — displays the current value of the temperature and
pressure inputs.
• TEST DIGITAL IN — displays the current status (on/off) of the switch
inputs.
• TEST DIGITAL OUT — displays the current status (on/off) of the control
outputs (e.g., solenoid valves) and allows the user to turn individual
outputs ON and OFF manually.
• TEST SYSTEM FLAG — displays the current status (on/off) of the
software flags associated with the C language portion (operating system)
of the control software.
• TEST USER FLAG — displays the current status (on/off) of the software
flags associated with the Boolean language portion (application program)
of the control software.
• TEST PRINTER — prints out a test string to verify that the printer is
functioning.
• TEST LED/BUZZER — lights the display panel LEDs and sounds the
alarm buzzer.

NOTE
Refer to Section 7 for detailed instructions on using the SERVICE menu.

3–2
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Viewing the Error Log The error log lists the type of error, date, time, and cycle number during
which it occurred. The error log contains information about the last 20
errors. When the error log is full, the oldest message is erased each time a
new message is stored.

To view the error log:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
ERROR LOG.
ACCESS REQUIRED The ERROR LOG screen appears.
3. Select the desired error from the list.

Figure 3–1. ERROR LOG SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

ERROR LOG
CHAMBER TEMP
DESCRIPTION CHAMBER PSIA
DATE TIME CYCLE NO.

WATER IN DRAIN 03/16/03 22:10 43


37.3 C
WATER IN DRAIN 03/16/03 14.68 PSI
21:56 43
WATER IN DRAIN 03/16/03 21:48 43

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME MORE PRINT OK


INFO
WS-0073

4. Press [MORE INFO].


Additional information is displayed (see Figure 3–2 on
page 3–4).

61301609701 3–3
Trouble Analysis

Figure 3–2. ERROR LOG INFORMATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP
ERROR. WATER IN DRAINCHAMBER PSIA
DATE 03/16/03
TIME 37.3 C 22:10 14.68 PSI
CYCLE P10 grv GRAVITY 1
PHASE PH01 STANDBY
CYCLE TIME
CYCLE COUNTER 43 0
00:00:00

REMAINING TIME

CANCEL OK

WS-0074

5. Press [OK].
6. Press [PRINT] to print out the list.
7. Press [OK] to return to the SERVICE menu, or press
[HOME] to return to the process screen.

3–4
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Viewing the Analog and ANALOG INPUTS


Digital Inputs
To view the analog inputs:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC > ANALOG INPUT.
ACCESS REQUIRED The TEST ANALOG IN screen appears.

Figure 3–3. TEST ANALOG IN SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
TEST ANALOG IN
INPUT CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER
ACT. VAL PSIA

AI00 Chamber Temp 88.0 C


37.3 C 14.68 PSI
AI01 Jacket Temp 87.5 C
AI03 Chamber PSIA 11.85 PSI

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0076A

3. Press [OK] to return to the DIAGNOSTIC menu, or press


[HOME] to return to the process screen.

61301609701 3–5
Trouble Analysis

DIGITAL INPUTS

To view the digital inputs:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC > DIGITAL INPUT.
ACCESS REQUIRED The TEST DIGITAL IN screen appears.

Figure 3–4. TEST DIGITAL IN SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

TEST DIGITAL IN
INPUT
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
MODE

DI00 CE Open 0
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
DI01 CE Not Closed 0
DI02 CE (RE) Sealed 0
DI04
DI05
DI08
RE Open
RE Not Closed
H20 Not In Drain
0
REMAINING TIME
0
0
0

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0077A

3. Compare with digital input LEDs on the CM1 Board (see


Figure 3–6 on page 3–8). The MODE field indicates
whether the input is ON (1) or OFF (0).

The black bar on the right indicates that there are more inputs than can be
NOTE viewed on the screen at one time. Use the up and down arrows to view
inputs not shown.

4. Press [OK] to return to the DIAGNOSTIC menu, or press


[HOME] to return to the process screen.

3–6
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Operating the Digital Most sterilizer malfunctions will result in a specific diagnostic message. The
Outputs Manually diagnostic message tables in Section 2 may recommend testing specific
solenoid valves to isolate the problem. Individual valves may be tested by
using the TEST DIGITAL OUT screen.

POSSIBILITY OF INJURY: The following procedure should be


WARNING performed only with the unit in standby and only by qualified
personnel. Manual operation of the valves under any other
conditions may result in dangerous conditions.

To operate the digital outputs manually:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC > DIGITAL OUTPUT
ACCESS REQUIRED The TEST DIGITAL OUT screen appears.

Figure 3–5. TEST DIGITAL OUT SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

TEST DIGITAL OUT


CHAMBER TEMP
OUTPUT MODE CHAMBER
SET PSIA
ACT. VAL

00 Steam to Chamber AUT 0 0


37.3 C 14.68 PSI
01 Chamber Drain AUT 0 0
02 Chamber Air-In AUT 0 0

0
03 Secondary Drain AUT 0 0
04 Secondary Buzzer AUT 0 0
05 Water to Ejector AUT 0 0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL AUTO/ 1/0 PULSE ACTI-


MAN VATE
WS-0078

The black bar on the right indicates that there are more inputs than can be
NOTE viewed on the screen at one time. Use the up and down arrows to view
inputs not shown.

61301609701 3–7
DI 00 1 JI CE Open

3–8
D32
D33 DI 01 2 JI CE Not Closed
D34 DI 02 3 JI CE (RE) Sealed
D35 DI 03 4 JI
D36 DI 04 5 JI RE Open
Trouble Analysis

D31 DI 05 6 JI RE Not Closed


D37 DI 06 7 JI
D38
DI 07 8 JI

2A2U
DI 08 9 JI H20 Not in Drain

CM1 Board
D56
D57 DI 09 10 JI Controls ON
D58 DI 10 11 JI Adequate Air Press.
3.

D59 DI 11 12 JI
D60 DI 12 13 JI
D55 DI 13 14 JI
Figure 3–6.

D61
DI 14 15 JI

Input LEDs
D62
DI 15 16 JI

D39 DO 00 1 JO Stm to Chamber


D40 DO 01 2 JO Chamber Drain
D41 DO 02 3 JO Chamber Air-In
D42 DO 03 4 JO Secondary Drain (Liq)
Figure 3–6. on page 3-8).

D43 DO 04 5 JO Secondary Buzzer


D44 DO 05 6 JO Water to Ejector
LEDs ON CM1 BOARD (2U)

D45 DO 06 7 JO Boiler ON
D46 DO 07 8 JO Steam to Jacket

D4 DO 08 9 JO CE, Open
D5 DO 09 10 JO CE, Close
D6 DO 10 11 JO CE (RE) Dr Seal
D7 DO 11 12 JO CE (RE) Unseal
D8 DO 12 13 JO RE, Open
D9 DO 13 14 JO RE, Close

Output LEDs
Compare the value (1 = ON, 0 = OFF) in the ACT. VAL.

D18 DO 14 15 JO Water Saver ON


field with the digital output LEDs on the CM1 Board (see

D11 DO 15 16 JO

WS-0114 A
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

4. To operate a manual output:


a. Select the desired output.
The MODE field will be highlighted.
b. Press [AUTO/MAN] to toggle between AUTO and MAN
mode.
c. Press [1/0] to toggle the value in the SET field.
d. Press [ACTIVATE] to confirm the setting.
The CONFIG MAN MODE SET? prompt will appear.
e. Press [YES] or [NO].
The selected output will change state.
5. To operate several manual outputs at a time:
a. Select the desired output.
The MODE field will be highlighted.
b. Press [AUTO/MAN] to toggle between AUTO and MAN
mode.
c. Press [1/0] to toggle the value in the SET field.
d. Repeat steps a. thru c. for the other settings.
e. Press [ACTIVATE] to confirm the setting.
The CONFIG MAN MODE SET? prompt will appear.
f. Press [YES] or [NO].
All selected outputs will change state.
6. To pulse a digital output(s):
a. Select the desired output.
The MODE field will be highlighted.
b. Press [AUTO/MAN] to toggle between AUTO and MAN
mode.
c. Repeat steps a. and b. for the other outputs if desired.
d. Press [PULSE].
The output will turn OFF for 10 seconds, turn ON for 5
seconds, then turn OFF.
7. Press [CANCEL] to exit manual mode at any time.
All outputs will return to Auto Mode and the SERVICE
menu will be displayed.
8. Press [HOME] to return to the main screen.

61301609701 3–9
Trouble Analysis

Viewing the System and User SYSTEM FLAGS


Flags
To view the system flags:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC >SYSTEM FLAG
ACCESS REQUIRED The TEST SYSTEM FLAG screen appears.

Figure 3–7. TEST SYSTEM FLAG SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
TEST SYSTEM FLAG
FLAG CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
MODE

SF000 INT I2C ERROR 1


37.3 C 0 14.68 PSI
SF001 PANEL 1 ERROR
SF002 PANEL 2 ERROR 0
SF003 RS232 COM ERROR 0
SF004
SF005
SF006
RS485 COM ERROR
ANYBUS COM ERROR 0 0
REMAINING TIME0
PRINT COM ERROR
0

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0080

NOTE
The black bar on the right indicates that there are more flags than can be
viewed on the screen at one time. Use the up and down arrows to view flags
not shown.

3. The MODE field indicates whether the software flag is ON


(1) or OFF (0).
4. Refer to the Appendix A for System Flag definitions.

NOTE
System flags do NOT provide a real-time indication of the control system
status.

3–10
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

USER FLAGS

To view the user flags:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC > USER FLAG
ACCESS REQUIRED The TEST USER FLAG screen appears.

Figure 3–8. TEST USER FLAG SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
TEST USER FLAG
FLAG CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
MODE

UF000 Process Failure 1


37.3 C 14.68 PSI
UF001 Start OK 0
UF002 Door Unseal OK 0
UF004 In Progress 0
UF005
UF006
UF007
Cycle Good
Always True Flag
0 1
Uni RE-EnabledREMAINING TIME0
0

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0079

NOTE
The black bar on the right indicates that there are more flags than can be
viewed on the screen at one time. Use the up and down arrows to view flags
not shown.

3. The MODE field indicates whether the software flag is ON


(1) or OFF (0).
4. Refer to the Appendix for User Flag definitions.

NOTE User flags provide a real-time indication of the program status. They update
immediately when an event occurs.

61301609701 3–11
Trouble Analysis

TROUBLE ANALYSIS TABLES

Most sterilizer malfunctions will result in a specific diagnostic message. The


following tables list some additional problems that are not covered by the
diagnostic message tables in Section 2

Table 3–1. Control System Trouble Analysis

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES REMEDY

Random or erratic action of signals on Power line malfunction. Turn power OFF, wait one minute, turn
the control panel. power ON.

Wire connections between Control Check that connectors are secure.


Box 2A and Display Panel.

Display Panel malfunction. Replace Display Panel.

CPU Board malfunction. Replace CPU Board 2A1U.

Table 3–2. Door Trouble Analysis

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Door does not rise easily when clos- Door cable restricted by object. Remove object.
ing.
Door cable broken. Replace cable.

Pulley requires lubrication. Lubricate pulleys .

Door gasket out of groove. Lubricate and reassemble.

Door does not latch when fully closed. Object under counterbalance weight. Remove object.

Cables too loose. Adjust pulley cable tension.

Door catch out of adjustment. Adjust door catch.

3–12
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Table 3–3. Door Interlock Switch Inputs

2A
DOOR
CONFIGURATION INPUT INPUT
SWITCHES
JACK

Single Door 1JS CE Door Sealed 4S

2JS Jumper

3JS CE Door Closed 3S

4JS Not Used

Double Door 1JS Door(s) Sealed 4S

2JS Jumper

3JS CE Door and RE Door Closed 3S and 7S

4JS Not Used

NOTES:
1. Interlock 1JS supplies power for the Steam to Chamber output when
the control end (CE) door is sealed. This interlock works in series with
2JS (power has to be supplied through both interlocks).
2. Interlock 2JS supplies power for the Steam to Chamber output when
the control end (RE) door is sealed. This interlock works in series with
1JS (power has to be supplied through both interlocks).
3. Interlock 3JS supplies power to the CE (RE) Steam to Gasket output
when the door(s) are closed. If the door(s) are not closed, then power
is not supplied and the door gasket(s) cannot be sealed. On standard
double door units, both doors must be closed.

61301609701 3–13
Trouble Analysis

Printer Troubleshooting The printer has a status indicator that flashes when the printer requires
attention.

Figure 3–9. STATUS INDICATOR

OFF = NO POWER

ON = READY

BLINKING = PRINTER NOT READY,


PAPER NOT PROPERLY INSERTED,
OR ROLL COVER OPEN
A00866BC

To test the printer:


SERVICE 1. Press [SETUP].
2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE
ACCESS REQUIRED
DIAGNOSTICS > PRINTER.
The printer outputs a test string.

Table 3–4. Printer Trouble Analysis

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES REMEDY

Control Panel is ON but printer status No power to printer. Check fuse 4F in Power Box 1A.
indicator is OFF.

Status Indicator is blinking. Paper jam Open the clear cover and paper roll
cover and check for paper jam. Rein-
sert the paper roll and close the paper
roll cover.

Paper roll cover not closed. Close the paper roll cover.

LOW POWER BROWN OUT mes- Message may occur when power is No action required.
sage printed out. applied to the sterilizer.

3–14
Section 4 Calibration and Adjustments

INTRODUCTION

This section includes:


• Pressure transducer and temperature sensor calibration
• Sterilizer configuration
• Control system adjustments
• Piping system adjustments
• Door adjustments
• Specifications for special tools

Service Data Refer to the following drawings as necessary:


• Piping Schematics (see Section 8)
• Electrical Schematics (see Section 9)
• Roughing-In Drawings (see Section 10)

For detailed drawings of the assemblies, refer to the Parts Catalog (Pub. No.
61301609702).

61301609701 4–1
Calibration and Adjustments

CALIBRATION

Overview There are two methods of calibration available through the service menu:
automatic and manual.

The procedures in this section use the automatic method (see page 7–24),
in which low and high reference values for each sensor are entered.

When the manual method (see page 7–25) is used, the gain and offset
values for each sensor are entered directly.

PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION (In Situ)

The pressure transducer is calibrated by connecting a pressure meter to the


sterilizer and comparing the pressure value displayed on the display panel
with the value on the pressure meter. The pressure is measured first with
vacuum in the chamber (low reference), then with the chamber at
atmospheric pressure (high reference). The actual low and high reference
values are entered using the display panel and the controls automatically
calibrate the pressure input.

Figure 4–1. PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION (In Situ)

Pressure
Transducer
Control
Display
Box

Chamber Compare
Readings
Pressure
Meter

Test Connection A08209-AB

PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION (Using Test Fixture)

Refer to Figure 4–2. The pressure transducer is calibrated by connecting a


pressure meter to a test fixture with an independent vacuum/pressure
supply and comparing the pressure value displayed on the display panel
with the value displayed on the meter. The pressure is measured first with
the test fixture evacuated (low reference), then with the test fixture
pressurized (high reference). The actual low and high reference values are
entered using the display panel and the controls automatically calibrate the
pressure input.

4–2
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 4–2. PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION (Test Fixture)

Pressure Transducer Control


Display
Box

Compare
Readings
Test Fixture
Pressure
Meter

Vacuum/ Test Connection


Pressure
Source
Pressure
Gauge
WS-0088A

TEMPERATURE SENSOR CALIBRATION (Using Test Plugs)

The temperature sensors (RTDs) are calibrated by disconnecting the


sensors from the control board and using test plugs with precision resistors
for the low and high reference values. The reference values are entered
using the display panel and the controls automatically calibrate the
temperature input.

Figure 4–3. TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION (TEST PLUGS)

Jacket RTD

Control Display
Box

Chamber

Test Plug
(Precision Resistance)

Drain
Chamber RTD
WS-0089

61301609701 4–3
Calibration and Adjustments

General Check To check the calibration of the unit, following the procedure below.

If the General Check shows that it is required, recalibrate the unit. See the
following procedures:
• “Calibrating the Pressure Transducer (In Situ Method)” on page 4–8.
• “Calibrating the Pressure Transducer (Using Test Fixture)” on page 4–13.
• “Calibrating the Temperature Sensors” on page 4–17.

Perform this at least once a year.

SPECIAL TOOLS
• pressure Meter, 0–50 psia, accurate to ±0.05 psia.
(must be an absolute pressure meter)

(see SPECIAL TOOLS—SPECIFICATIONS on page 4–40)


• grounding strap

Wear a grounding strap at all times when inside the control box.
Otherwise, damage to the electronic components can result.

OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS
FOR HANDLING

SENSITIVE
DEVICES

SETUP

Before beginning the check, ensure the following:


• The DETAILS process screen is selected.
• The pressure units are set to PSIA (see “Setting Up the Display Panel” on
page 7–38).
• Chamber and jacket steam traps are functioning.
• Chamber and jacket bleed valves are closed.
• The Bridge Compensation Table values are correct for the serial number
of the pressure transducer (see Figure 5–2, “PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER DATA CARD,” on page 5–5).

4–4
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE VERIFICATION


1. Connect the pressure meter.

NOTE
Be sure the pressure meter is at the same level or higher than the pressure
meter connection on the unit, so that water does not build up in the tubing to
the pressure meter. Also be sure the tubing does not form a loop below the
pressure meter. If standing water collects in the tubing, extra static pressure
from the water column can result in faulty meter readings.

Figure 4–4. PRESSURE METER CONNECTION

Pressure Meter
Connection

DISPLAY PANEL IN RAISED POSITION


A09701-A

2. Turn ON the sterilizer.


3. Check the atmospheric pressure.
a. Open the sterilizer door.
b. With the sterilizer in standby mode, note the chamber
pressure as displayed on the process screen.
c. Verify the pressure displayed is within ±0.2 psi of the
pressure meter reading.
4. Select a gravity or prevacuum cycle and adjust the cycle
parameters to the following settings:
• Exposure Temperature — 275°F (135°C)
• Exposure Time — 10 minutes (00:10:00)
• Drying Time — 16 minutes (00:16:00)

61301609701 4–5
Calibration and Adjustments

5. Check the high pressure.


a. Start the cycle.
b. After the sterilizer has been in the EXPOSURE phase
for approximately three minutes, note the chamber
pressure displayed on the process screen.
c. Verify the pressure displayed is within ±0.2 psi of the
pressure meter reading.
d. If the pressure displayed is NOT within ±0.2 psi of the
pressure meter reading, check the following:
• Pressure transducer wiring and connectors are
tight.
• Chamber and jacket steam traps are functioning.
• Chamber and jacket bleed valves are closed.
• The Bridge Compensation Table values are correct
for the serial number of the pressure transducer.
Calibrate the pressure transducer (see “Calibrating the
Pressure Transducer (In Situ Method)” on page 4–8).
Then repeat steps 3 thru 5. Do not proceed to step 6
until a satisfactory reading is displayed.
6. Check the CHAMBER gauge(s).
• Verify that the CHAMBER pressure gauge reads within
±2 psi of the pressure meter reading. If the unit is dou-
ble door, check both CHAMBER pressure gauges.
7. Check the temperature.
a. While the unit is still in the EXPOSURE phase,
observe the STEAM TABLE DIFF value on the
DETAILS process screen.
b. Verify the number displayed, when at its lowest value,
is between –0.4 and +0.4.
c. If the number displayed is NOT within the limits, check
the following:
• The temperature sensors are inserted to the
proper depths (see Figure 5–1 on page 5–4).
• Sensor cable wiring and connectors are intact.
Calibrate the temperature sensors (see Perform “Cali-
brating the Temperature Sensors” on page 4–17).
Then repeat steps 3 thru 7. Do not proceed to step 8
until a satisfactory reading is displayed.

4–6
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

8. Check the pressure during the VACUUM DRY phase as


follows:
a. After the sterilizer has been in the VACUUM DRY
phase for approximately 3 minutes, note the chamber
pressure displayed on the process screen.
b. Verify the pressure displayed is within ±0.2 psi of the
pressure meter reading.
c. If the pressure displayed is NOT within ±0.2 psi of the
pressure meter reading, check the following:
• Pressure transducer wiring and connectors are
tight.
• Chamber and jacket steam traps are functioning.
• Chamber and jacket bleed valves are closed.
• The Bridge Compensation Table values are correct
for the serial number of the pressure transducer.
Calibrate the pressure transducer (see “Calibrating the
Pressure Transducer (In Situ Method)” on page 4–8).
Then repeat steps 3 thru 8. Do not proceed to step 9
until a satisfactory reading is displayed.
9. Allow the cycle to complete.
10. Print out the report of the cycle. Be sure the printout
indicates the cycle completed without errors.

61301609701 4–7
Calibration and Adjustments

Calibrating the Pressure SPECIAL TOOLS


Transducer (In Situ Method) • pressure Meter, 0–50 psia, accurate to ±0.05 psia (must be an absolute
pressure meter) — see page 4–40 for specification.
• grounding strap

SETUP

• Wear a grounding strap at all times when inside the control box.
CAUTIONS Otherwise, damage to the electronic components can result.
• During calibration of any circuit, an appropriate input must be inserted on
all temperature and pressure circuits. The absence of an input on any
circuit may result in an improper calibration.
• When calibrating temperature and pressure signals, all sensor inputs
must be within range. Before turning on power, ensure that all sensors
are connected or that a calibration test plug is attached.

NOTES
• Pressure readings must agree to within ±0.2 psi.
• Each calibration may be done either as an independent procedure or as
part of a series (see “Calibrating the Temperature Sensors and Pressure
Transducer” on page 7–24).

Before performing the calibration procedure:


1. Close and seal the door.
2. Unplug Air-In valve 3SV from 3JO on the back of the
control box.

PULL A VACUUM

SERVICE 3. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTICS > TEST DIGITAL OUT.
ACCESS REQUIRED 4. Turn ON the following outputs:
• Steam to Chamber (DO 00)
• Chamber Drain (DO 01)
• Water to Ejector (DO 06)
5. Purge the chamber for 3 minutes.
6. Turn OFF the Steam to Chamber (DO 00) output.
7. When the pressure is below 2 psia on the pressure meter,
turn OFF the Chamber Drain (DO 01) and Water to Ejector
(DO 06) outputs.
8. Allow the vacuum to stabilize.

4–8
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

9. Wait for the reading on the pressure meter to stabilize.


CALIBRATION 10. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> MANUAL.
ACCESS REQUIRED The MANUAL CALIBRATION screen appears.

Figure 4–5. MANUAL CALIBRATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
MANUAL CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUEPSIA

00 Chamber Temp 9.999 -894.9 87.5


37.3 C
01 Jacket Temp 9.999 -894.914.68
87.5PSI
03 Chamber PSIA 9.999 -88.13 11.85

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0066A

11. Verify Chamber PSIA sensors are set to GAIN = 1.000 and
OFFSET = 0.000.
12. Adjust the GAIN and OFFSET as necessary. (See
“RECORD CALIBRATION DATA” on page 5–15).

61301609701 4–9
Calibration and Adjustments

CALIBRATE THE LOW REF VALUE


13. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> AUTOMATIC.
The AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION screen appears.
14. Set the CALIBRATE field for the 03 Chamber PSIA input to
YES.

Figure 4–6. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR CHAMBER PSIA
CALIBRATE

00 Chamber Temp NO 14.68 PSI


37.3 C
01 Jacket Temp NO
03 Chamber PSIA YES

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME NEXT

WS-0063A

15. Press ENTER.


The [NEXT] softkey appears.
16. Press [NEXT]
The LOW REF: field is highlighted.
17. Enter the pressure meter reading in the LOW REF: field.

4–10
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 4–7. ENTER LOW REFERENCE

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUE PSIA

03 Chamber PSIA 1.001 0.33 2.0


37.3 C 14.68 PSI

LOW REF: 0.0


0
REMAINING TIME
HIGH REF: 00.0

CANCEL LOW +/-


SAVE
WS-0064

18. Press [LOW SAVE].


The HIGH REF: field is highlighted.
19. Plug 3SV into the 3JO jack on the back of the control box.
20. Wait for the reading in the display window to stabilize.

CALIBRATE THE HIGH REF VALUE


21. Enter the pressure meter reading in the HIGH REF: field.

Figure 4–8. ENTER HIGH REFERENCE

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUE PSIA

03 Chamber PSIA 1.001 0.33 0.00


37.3 C 14.68 PSI

LOW REF: 2.0


0 HIGH REF: 14.7
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HIGH
SAVE
WS-0065

22. Press [HIGH SAVE].


The PRINT CALIBRATION PROTOCOL? prompt appears.

61301609701 4–11
Calibration and Adjustments

23. Press YES.


The printer will print the new values for GAIN, OFFSET,
LOW REF and HIGH REF.
24. Tear off and save the printouts as the calibration record.
25. Return all outputs to automatic.
SERVICE 26. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SAVE RAM TO
FLASH.
ACCESS REQUIRED 27. Press [YES].
• The loading process takes approximately 10 to 15
seconds.
• During the loading process, either a
COMMUNICATION ERROR or a SAVE RAM TO
FLASH message occurs.
28. Pressure transducer calibration is complete.

4–12
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Calibrating the Pressure SPECIAL TOOLS


Transducer (Using Test • test fixture with independent vacuum/pressure source — call Getinge
Fixture) USA Technical Services for specifications.
• pressure Meter, 0–50 psia, accurate to ±0.05 psia (must be an absolute
pressure meter) — see page 4–40 for specification.
• grounding strap

SETUP

• Wear a grounding strap at all times when inside the control box.
CAUTIONS Otherwise, damage to the electronic components can result.
• During calibration of any circuit, an appropriate input must be inserted on
all temperature and pressure circuits. The absence of an input on any
circuit may result in an improper calibration.
• When calibrating temperature and pressure signals, all sensor inputs
must be within range. Before turning on power, ensure that all sensors
are connected or that a calibration test plug is attached.

NOTES
• Pressure readings must agree to within ±0.2 psi.
• Each calibration may be done either as an independent procedure or as
part of a series (see “Calibrating the Temperature Sensors and Pressure
Transducer” on page 7–24).

Before performing the calibration procedure:


CALIBRATION 1. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> MANUAL.
ACCESS REQUIRED The MANUAL CALIBRATION screen appears.

Figure 4–9. MANUAL CALIBRATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
MANUAL CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUEPSIA

00 Chamber Temp 9.999 -894.9 87.5


37.3 C
01 Jacket Temp 9.999 -894.914.68
87.5PSI
03 Chamber PSIA 9.999 -88.13 11.85

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0066A

61301609701 4–13
Calibration and Adjustments

2. Verify all sensors are set to GAIN = 1.000 and OFFSET =


0.000.
3. Adjust the GAIN and OFFSET as necessary. (See
“RECORD CALIBRATION DATA” on page 5–15). Remove
the pressure transducer and connect it to the fitting on the
test fixture.
4. Connect the pressure meter to the pressure meter
connection on the test fixture.

PULL A VACUUM
5. Apply vacuum to the text fixture until the pressure is below
2 psia.
6. Allow the vacuum to stabilize.
7. Wait for the reading on the pressure meter to stabilize.

CALIBRATE THE LOW REF VALUE


8. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> AUTOMATIC.
The AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION screen appears.
9. Set the CALIBRATE field for the 03 Chamber PSIA input to
YES.

Figure 4–10. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR CHAMBER PSIA
CALIBRATE

00 Chamber Temp NO 14.68 PSI


37.3 C
01 Jacket Temp NO
03 Chamber PSIA YES

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME NEXT

WS-0063A

10. Press ENTER.


The [NEXT] softkey appears.
11. Press [NEXT]
The LOW REF: field is highlighted.

4–14
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

12. Enter the pressure meter reading in the LOW REF: field.

Figure 4–11. ENTER LOW REFERENCE

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUE PSIA

03 Chamber PSIA 1.001 0.33 2.0


37.3 C 14.68 PSI

LOW REF: 0.0


0
REMAINING TIME
HIGH REF: 00.0

CANCEL LOW +/-


SAVE
WS-0064

13. Press [LOW SAVE].


The HIGH REF: field is highlighted.
14. Turn off the vacuum and allow the pressure to return to
atmosphere.
15. Wait for the reading in the display window to stabilize.

CALIBRATE THE HIGH REF VALUE


16. Enter the pressure meter reading in the HIGH REF: field.

Figure 4–12. ENTER HIGH REFERENCE

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUE PSIA

03 Chamber PSIA 1.001 0.33 0.00


37.3 C 14.68 PSI

LOW REF: 2.0


0 HIGH REF: 14.7
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HIGH
SAVE
WS-0065

17. Press [HIGH SAVE].


The PRINT CALIBRATION PROTOCOL? prompt appears.

61301609701 4–15
Calibration and Adjustments

18. Press YES.


The printer will print the new values for GAIN, OFFSET,
LOW REF and HIGH REF.
19. Tear off and save the printouts as the calibration record.
20. Return all outputs to automatic.
SERVICE 21. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SAVE RAM TO
FLASH.
ACCESS REQUIRED 22. Press [YES].
• The loading process takes approximately 10 to 15
seconds.
• During the loading process, a communication error
message appears.
23. Pressure transducer calibration is complete. Reinstall the
pressure transducer on the sterilizer.

4–16
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Calibrating the Temperature SPECIAL TOOLS


Sensors • test plugs (temperature) — see page 4–41 for part numbers.
- Low—15°C (59°F)
- High—143°C (289.4°F)
• grounding strap

SETUP

• Wear a grounding strap at all times when inside the control box.
CAUTIONS Otherwise, damage to the electronic components can result.
• During calibration of any circuit, an appropriate input must be inserted on
all temperature and pressure circuits. The absence of an input on any
circuit may result in an improper calibration.
• When calibrating temperature and pressure signals, all sensor inputs
must be within range. Before turning on power, ensure that all sensors
are connected or that a calibration test plug is attached.

NOTES • Temperature readings must agree to within ±0.5°F (±0.3°C).


• Each calibration may be done either as an independent procedure or as
part of a series (see “Calibrating the Temperature Sensors and Pressure
Transducer” on page 7–24).

Before performing the calibration procedure:


CALIBRATION 1. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> MANUAL.
ACCESS REQUIRED The MANUAL CALIBRATION screen appears.

Figure 4–13. MANUAL CALIBRATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
MANUAL CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUEPSIA

00 Chamber Temp 9.999 -894.9 87.5


37.3 C
01 Jacket Temp 9.999 -894.914.68
87.5PSI
03 Chamber PSIA 9.999 -88.13 11.85

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0066A

61301609701 4–17
Calibration and Adjustments

2. Verify all sensors are set to GAIN = 1.000 and OFFSET =


0.000,
3. Adjust the GAIN and OFFSET as necessary. (See
“RECORD CALIBRATION DATA” on page 5–15).

CHAMBER TEMPERATURE SENSOR—LOW REF


4. Turn OFF the steam supply.

The steam supply can be turned off by using Manual Mode to turn off the
NOTE
Steam to Chamber and Steam to Jacket outputs.

5. Turn OFF the circuit breaker on Power Box 1A.


6. Disconnect Chamber (Drain) Sensor 1RT from J4 on CM1
board 2U.

Figure 4–14. LOCATION OF TEST PLUGS ON CM1 BOARD (2U)

J4

J3 Analog Input #1 Analog Input #2

R R W W R R W W

Chamber RTD Liquid RTD


AI00 AI02

Analog Input #3 Analog Input #4

R R W W R G Bu Bk W

Jacket RTD Press. Trans.


AI01 AI03
A00299-H

4–18
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

7. Replace the sensor with the LOW Test Plug (15°C (59°F)).
8. Turn ON the circuit breaker on Power Box 1A.
9. Press [SETUP].
10. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> AUTOMATIC.
The AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION screen appears.
11. Set the CALIBRATE field for the 00 Chamber Temp input to
YES.

Figure 4–15. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR CHAMBER PSIA
CALIBRATE

00 Chamber Temp YES


37.3 C 14.68 PSI
01 Jacket Temp NO
03 Chamber PSIA NO

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME

WS-0128A

12. Press ENTER.


The [NEXT] softkey appears.
13. Press [NEXT]
The LOW REF: field is highlighted.

61301609701 4–19
Calibration and Adjustments

Figure 4–16. ENTER LOW REFERENCE

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUEPSIA

00 Chamber
37.3 C Temp 1.000 0.0 15.0
14.68 PSI

LOW REF: 15.0


0
REMAINING TIME
HIGH REF: 0.0

CANCEL LOW +/–


SAVE
WS-0129

14. Wait for the reading in the display window to stabilize.


15. Set LOW REF: to 15.0°C (59.0°F).
16. Press [LOW SAVE].
The HIGH REF: field is highlighted.

CHAMBER TEMPERATURE SENSOR — HIGH REF


17. Replace the LOW Test Plug with the HIGH Test Plug
(143°C (289.4°F)).
18. Set HIGH REF: to 143.0°C (289.4°F) (see Figure 4–17 on
page 4–20).

Figure 4–17. ENTER HIGH REFERENCE

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUEPSIA

03 Chamber
37.3 C Temp 1.000 0.0 143.0
14.68 PSI

LOW REF: 15.0


0
REMAINING HIGH
TIMEREF: 143.0

CANCEL HIGH
SAVE
WS-0130

4–20
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

19. Press [HIGH SAVE].


The PRINT CALIBRATION PROTOCOL? prompt appears.
20. Press [YES].
• The printer will print the new values for GAIN, OFF-
SET, LOW REF, and HIGH REF.
• Tear off and save the printouts as the calibration
record.
21. Press [CANCEL].
22. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> MANUAL.
The MANUAL CALIBRATION screen appears (see
Figure 4–13 on page 4–17).
23. Adjust the gain and offset values for Chamber Temp:
a. Add .004 to the GAIN value.
b. Subtract .600 from the OFFSET value.
24. Press OK.
SERVICE 25. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SAVE RAM TO
FLASH.
ACCESS REQUIRED 26. Press [YES].
• The loading process takes approximately 10 to 15
seconds.
• During the loading process, a communication error
message appears.
27. Turn OFF the circuit breaker on Power Box 1A.
28. Chamber RTD calibration is complete. Reconnect
Chamber (Drain) Sensor 1RT to J4 on CM1 Board 2U.

61301609701 4–21
Calibration and Adjustments

JACKET TEMPERATURE SENSOR — LOW REF


1. Verify the steam supply is OFF.

• The steam supply can be turned off by using Manual Mode to turn off the
NOTES
Steam to Chamber and Steam to Jacket outputs.
• If the steam supply is not turned off, the jacket pressure may increase,
possibly venting steam into the room.

2. Turn OFF the circuit breaker on Power Box 1A.


3. Disconnect Jacket Sensor 2RT from J3 on CM1 board 2U.
4. Replace the sensor with the LOW Test Plug (15°C (59°F))
(see Figure 4–14 on page 4–18).
5. Turn ON the circuit breaker on Power Box 1A.
6. Press [SETUP].
CALENDAR 7. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> AUTOMATIC.
ACCESS REQUIRED The AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION screen appears.

Figure 4–18. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR CHAMBER PSIA
CALIBRATE

00 Chamber Temp NO
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
01 Jacket Temp YES
03 Chamber PSIA NO

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME

WS-0131A

8. Set the CALIBRATE field for the 01 Jacket Temp input to


YES.
9. Press ENTER.
The [NEXT] softkey appears.
10. Press [NEXT].
The LOW REF: field is highlighted.

4–22
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

11. Wait for the reading in the display window to stabilize.


12. Set LOW REF: to 15.0°C (59.0°F).

Figure 4–19. ENTER LOW REFERENCE

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUEPSIA

AI01 Jacket
37.3 CTemp 1.000 0.0 15.0
14.68 PSI

LOW REF: 15.0


0
REMAINING TIME
HIGH REF: 0.0

CANCEL LOW +/–


SAVE
WS-0132

13. Press [LOW SAVE].


The HIGH REF: field is highlighted.

Figure 4–20. ENTER HIGH REFERENCE

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUEPSIA

01 Jacket Temp 1.000 0.0 143.0


37.3 C 14.68 PSI

LOW REF: 15.0


0HIGH
REMAINING REF: 143.0
TIME

CANCEL HIGH
SAVE
WS-0133

61301609701 4–23
Calibration and Adjustments

JACKET TEMPERATURE SENSOR — HIGH REF


14. Replace the LOW Test Plug with the HIGH Test Plug
(143°C (289.4°F)).

A JACKET OVER-TEMP alarm will sound. To clear the alarm, press


NOTE
CLEAR/ALARM.

15. Set HI REF: to 143.0°C (289.4°F) (see Figure 4–20 on


page 4–23).
16. Press [HIGH SAVE].
The PRINT CALIBRATION PROTOCOL? prompt appears.
17. Press [YES].
The printer will print the new values for GAIN, OFFSET,
LOW REF, and HIGH REF.
18. Tear off and save the printouts as the calibration record.
19. Press [CANCEL].
20. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> MANUAL.
The MANUAL CALIBRATION screen appears (see
Figure 4–13 on page 4–17).
21. Adjust the gain and offset values for Jacket Temp:
a. Add .004 to the GAIN value.
b. Subtract .600 from the OFFSET value.
22. Press OK.
SERVICE 23. Select SYSTEM MENU > SAVE RAM TO FLASH.
24. Press [YES].
ACCESS REQUIRED
• The loading process takes approximately 10 to 15
seconds.
• During the loading process, a communication error
message appears.
25. Jacket RTD calibration is complete. Reconnect Jacket
Sensor 2RT to J3 on CM1 Board 2U.
26. Turn ON the steam supply.

4–24
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Verification Check 1. Run the “SPECIAL TOOLS” on page 4–4.


2. If the unit fails the general check:
• Repeat the calibration.
• Replace the temperature sensors.
• Replace the pressure transducer.
• Replace CM1 board 2U.

61301609701 4–25
Calibration and Adjustments

STERILIZER CONFIGURATION

The door configuration and sterilizer options are selected from the
DIPSWITCHES menu.

Setting Up the Door To set up the door configuration:


Configuration and Sterilizer
Model 1. Press [SETUP].
DIP SWITCHES 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > DIP
SWITCHES.
ACCESS REQUIRED The DIP SWITCHES screen appears.

Figure 4–21. DIP SWITCHES SCREEN (Door Configuration)

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
DIPSWITCHES
CHAMBER TEMP
DESCRIPTION STATUS CHAMBER PSIA

DS01 SD=0 DD=1 1


DS04 37.3 500=1
400=0 C 0 14.68 PSI
DS08 Utility S.D. 0
DS11 Parameter Check 0
DS12
DS13
DS14
Jacket Bypass
T-Doc
Water-Saver
0 0
REMAINING
0

0 TIME

CANCEL HOME PRINT OK

WS-0071A

3. Set the switches outputs as follows:


a. If the unit has double doors, set DS01 to 1.
b. If the unit is a 500 Series sterilizer, set DS04 to 1.
4. Press [SAVE].
5. Press [OK] when finished.

4–26
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Enabling the Sterilizer To enable the sterilizer options:


Options
DIP SWITCHES 1. Select SYSTEM MENU > DIP SWITCHES.
The DIP SWITCHES screen appears.
ACCESS REQUIRED 2. Select the software features per customer request:
• Utilities Control (see page 6–2) — set DS08 to 1.
• Parameter Check (see page 6–5) — set DS11 to 1.
3. Select the hardware options the sterilizer is equipped with:
• Jacket Bypass — set DS12 to 1.
• T-Doc System — set DS13 to 1.
• MP-129F Water-Saver (see “WATER-SAVER” on
page 6–11) — set DS14 to 1
4. Press [SAVE].
5. Press [OK] when finished.

61301609701 4–27
Calibration and Adjustments

CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

Pressure Switch THEORY OF OPERATION

The pressure switch detects the pressure applied to the chamber door
gasket. When the gasket pressure exceeds 18 - 20 PSIG, two internal
switches are activated (closed) and the chamber door is considered sealed.

One of switches functions as an electromechanical safety device in the door


interlock circuit. When it is activated, it enables power to the Steam to
Chamber output (DO 00). When it is open, it prevents steam from entering
the chamber.

The other switch is used by the control system to sense when the door is
sealed/unsealed. When it is closed, it activates DI 02, the control system
considers the door to be sealed, and a cycle can then be started.

Figure 4–22. PRESSURE SWITCH OPERATION

Chamber Pressure (AI 03)

Interlock
NO
C Pressure
NC
NO Switch
Door Sealed (DI 02) C 4S
NC

Seal Door (DO 10)


Pressure
1PT
Control Box 2A Steam In Transducer

2UJ4 10SV Gasket


1JS
Headring
Control End
3JI
Door
11JO Remote End
Unseal Door (DO 11) Door
12JO

A08215-AE

12SV

Vacuum/Drain

4–28
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

VERIFYING OPERATION

SHOCK HAZARD: 24V~ is present on the terminals of the


WARNING
pressure switch. Turn OFF power to the sterilizer when
connecting the test lamp and when adjusting the pressure
switch.

To test the operation of the pressure switch and safety


interlock:
1. Turn off the Steam Supply.
2. Close but do not seal the chamber door(s) and turn OFF
the circuit breaker.
3. Remove the cover from the pressure switch.
4. Identify the switch that is connected to the door interlock
circuit (the cable from the door interlock is labeled 2A1JS).
5. Connect a 24V~ test lamp or voltmeter between the
normally open (NO) contact of the door interlock switch
and ground.

Figure 4–23. PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK

Test Lamp
DI 02 Input
(2A3JI)

NC

NO
NC

NO

Ground

Interlock
(2A1JS)
A08215-AF

6. Turn ON the circuit breaker and open the control box cover
to view the digital input and output LEDs.
a. Confirm the test lamp is OFF (interlock open).
b. Confirm DI 02 LED is OFF (door unsealed).
7. Using manual mode (see “Operating the Digital Outputs
Manually” on page 3–7), attempt to pressurize the
chamber by turning ON digital output DO 00 (Steam to
Chamber).

61301609701 4–29
Calibration and Adjustments

Confirm that Steam to Chamber solenoid valve 1SV is not


energized.

The DOOR SEALED LED will illuminate, but there should be no power to
NOTE
1SV.

8. Turn OFF digital output DO02 (Air In).


9. Turn OFF digital output DO01 (Drain).
10. Turn on the Steam Supply.
11. Seal the door(s) by pressing DOOR SEAL.
12. Pressurize the chamber by turning ON digital output DO00
(Steam to Chamber).
13. When the chamber pressure is 3 psig or above, turn OFF
digital output DO00.

PRESS IN CHAMBER alarm will occur.


NOTE

14. Attempt to unseal the door by pressing DOOR UNSEAL.


15. Depressurize the chamber by turning ON digital output
DO05 (Water to Ejector) and DO01 (Chamber Drain)
16. When the chamber pressure is less than 0 psig, turn OFF
digital outputs DO05 and DO01.
17. Turn ON digital output DO02; allow the chamber pressure
to reach 0 psig.
18. Set all digital inputs back to AUTO mode and seal the
door(s).
a. Confirm the door gasket is pressurized (door cannot
be opened).
b. Confirm DI 02 LED is ON (door sealed).
c. Confirm the test lamp is ON (interlock closed).
19. Unseal the door by pressing DOOR UNSEAL.

4–30
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

ADJUSTMENT

The pressure switch has two internal switches. Although each switch is
capable of being adjusted at different settings, both are set to activate
(close) at 20 PSIG and de-activate (open) at 18 PSIG (deadband of 2 PSI)

Long term drift settings of 16 to 25 PSIG are acceptable.


NOTE

In order to accurately confirm or adjust the setting of the pressure switch, it


should be disconnected from the sterilizer piping and connected to a
pressure source with a regulator and pressure gauge. An alternative
method is to incrementally regulate the monitor the pressure/vacuum to the
door gasket while sealing and unsealing the door.

To adjust the setting, remove the switch cover and locate the adjustment
screw that protrudes from the vessel module. Adjusting it clockwise
increases the pressure setpoint and counterclockwise decreases it.

The secondary adjustment screw that is between one of the switches and
NOTE
the transfer pivot arm assures that both switches activate/de-activate at the
same time and should not require adjustment.

Figure 4–24. PRESSURE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT

Secondary Adjustment
(DO NOT ADJUST)
Adjustment
Screw

A09701-K

61301609701 4–31
Calibration and Adjustments

Adjusting the Brightness of To adjust the brightness:


the Display
1. Press the [SETUP] softkey.
2. Select ABOUT from the menu list.
The ABOUT screen appears

Figure 4–25. ABOUT SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

ABOUT
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
Getinge PACS 3000
PANEL Version: 3.05
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
PACS Version: 3.08
PROM Update: 9/1/2004
SDN:
Model No.:
0 61301609674
400-500 HCMC
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME BRIGHT BRIGHT OK


DEC INC
WS-0035 400-500 HCMC

3. Press [BRIGHT INC] to increase the brightness or


[BRIGHT DEC] to decrease it.
4. Press [OK] when done.

Adjusting the Secondary The secondary alarm is located on the back of Control Box 2A.
Alarm Buzzer The volume level is adjusted by opening or closing the shutter
as shown in Figure 4–26.

Figure 4–26. SECONDARY ALARM

Baffle Plate

Alarm
Shutter
Increase Decrease
Volume Volume

99-06C

4–32
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

PIPING SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

Needle Valves There are two needle valves on the sterilizer:


• Chamber bleed valve 1NV
• Jacket bleed valve 2NV

Some sterilizers also have a drain cooling water valve.

CHAMBER AND JACKET BLEED VALVES

The chamber and jacket bleed valves are closed during the normal
operation of the sterilizer. They are NOT used to adjust the bleed rate of the
chamber or jacket pressure.

The chamber bleed valve should only be open when the chamber pressure
needs to be drained for service. The jacket bleed valve should only be open
when the jacket pressure needs to be drained prior to service. Keep these
valves closed all other times.

DRAIN COOLING WATER VALVE

The drain cooling water valve should be adjusted to ensure that the sterilizer
discharge at the drain funnel does not exceed 140°F.

Figure 4–27. NEEDLE AND BALL VALVES

Jacket Bleed
Needle Valve

VACUUM TO DOOR(S)
Ball Valve

Drain Cooling Water


Needle Valve
Chamber Bleed
Needle Valve

STEAM TO DOOR(S)
Ball Valve A09701-H

61301609701 4–33
Calibration and Adjustments

Hand-Operated Ball Valves There are two hand-operated ball valves on the sterilizer:
• STEAM TO DOOR(S) valve 1HV
• VACUUM TO DOOR(S) valve 2HV.

The STEAM TO DOOR(S) valve is normally OPEN and is only closed during
emergency opening of the door.

The VACUUM TO DOOR(S) valve is normally CLOSED and is only open


during emergency opening of the door.

4–34
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

DOOR ADJUSTMENTS

The door will travel fully upward and downward with no binding, and with
minimum friction and noise, when properly adjusted.

Remove the lower face panel for access to the door for adjustments.

Figure 4–28. DOOR ASSEMBLY

Door Closed
Switch

Door Guide
Channel

Channel
Bracket

Door Cover

Door Lug

Frame

Weight
Guide

Weight

Rod Locknuts

A09701-C

61301609701 4–35
Calibration and Adjustments

The door latch will not support the weight of the door. Support
WARNING the weight of the door with blocking under it before repair to
avoid injury from a free-falling door.

NOTE Make door adjustments with a hot chamber and door so that adjustments
are made under normal heat expansion conditions.

Door Counterbalance The door counterbalance weight should just touch the frame at the same
Weight Adjustment time that the door latches, and have tension on the door cables. The top of
the door should be even with the top of the machined surface of the
headring.

To adjust the counterbalance weight:

1. Adjust the weight by loosening the locknut and turning the


turnbuckles into or out of, the weight.
2. After adjustment, tighten the turnbuckle locknuts.
3. Check that the weight guides are adjusted for minimum
friction during the upward and downward travel of the door.

4–36
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Door Catch Adjustment Check and adjust the door catch as follows:

1. Raise the door and observe the door catch:


• The engagement roller should contact the forward
slope of the door catch as illustrated when the door is
raised. The door will then be held in place when the
roller seats in the C-bend of the door catch.
• The top leaf of the door catch will trip the roller when
the door is lowered.
2. If necessary, adjust the catch:
a. Loosen the adjustment screws.
b. Position the engagement roller so that it contacts the
door catch at the specified location surface.
c. Tighten the adjustment screws.

Figure 4–29. DOOR CATCH ADJUSTMENT

Engagement
Roller

Adjustment
Screw

Upper Leaf

Forward Slope

Door Catch

Bottom of
Door Plate
A09701-D

61301609701 4–37
Calibration and Adjustments

Door Switch Adjustment The door switch is located above the door opening. The top of the door
engages the switch plunger. Door switch operation is identified by the proper
LED on CM1 Board (2U).

Check and adjust the door switch as follows:


1. Open the control box to observe the CM1 LEDs.
2. Raise the door to the closed position. The LED should
come on just before the engagement rollers lock on the
door catches.
3. Close the door.
4. If the switch requires adjustment:
a. Loosen the switch in the bracket.
b. Adjust the switch so that it is centered on the door
plate.
c. Tighten the switch.

Figure 4–30. DOOR SWITCH

Switch Bracket
Slotted Hole

Door Plate

Door Lug
CL

Door Switch Slotted Hole


A09701-L

Door Guide Adjustment The door guides are the cylindrical rods below the door. They control the
position of the door during door travel.

Check and adjust the door guide as follows:

1. Lower the door to the fully open position.


2. Check that the top of the door is parallel with the inside of
the headring.
3. If necessary, adjust the door guide:
a. Loosen the securing bolts on the bottom of the door
guides.
b. Align the guides to level the door.
c. Raise and lower the door. Check for binding.

4–38
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

d. Readjust only one of the guides to eliminate binding or


friction.

Door Cover Adjustment The door cover should be centered in the lower face panel with an alignment
and centering clearance of 1/16” (1.2 mm) on all sides.

Adjust the cover as follows:

1. Loosen the two cover screws and center the lower door
edge in the face panel.
2. Loosen the cover retaining plate screws and move the
cover plate to center the upper edge of the door cover.

Ensure the door lug bolts are secure. If loose, apply Loctite
WARNING #242 to the bolts and torque to 75 ft-lbs to ensure the integrity
of the door, maintain a sealed system, and prevent steam
burns.

Door Alignment Align the door as follows:

1. Check that the side play clearance of the teflon guides


within the door guide channels is 1/32” to 1/16” (0.8 to 1.6
mm) when the door is hot. Loosen the two channel bracket
screws and move the bracket to obtain the required teflon
guide clearance.
2. Ensure that the door is aligned and centered squarely with
the chamber. Measure from the door guide channel to the
inside surface of the chamber. The dimension should be
within 1/32” to 1/16” (0.8 to 1.6 mm). Adjustment can be
attained by loosening the two screws in the door channel
bracket and moving the bracket.
3. Raise the door to position the upper edge between the lugs
and the headring. Clearance of the door plate from either
surface should be 1/32” + 1/64” (0.8 + 0.4 mm). Adjust-
ments can be attained by loosening the hex nut that
secures the door guide channel to the channel bracket.

61301609701 4–39
Calibration and Adjustments

SPECIAL TOOLS—SPECIFICATIONS

Pressure Meter—Standard Accuracy required for pressure calibration standard:


For PSIA Test Meter • Range: 0 to 50 psia with 100 psia minimum over-pressure
• Each calibration to be NBS traceable with calibration report
• Supply Voltage—120 V~, 47 to 63 Hz
• Medium Capacity
- Water/Steam
- Air
• Accuracy (of display) = ±0.05 PSI at 25°C
Accuracy errors shall include all of the following:
- Linearity
- Repeatability
- Hysteresis at 25°C
- Sensitivity
- NBS Traceability
• Temperature Range (Operating): 0°C to 70°C
• Temperature Range (Storage): –40°C to 85°C
• Temperature Drift: ±0.0025 PSI/°C
• Warm-up Time: 20 minutes (minimum)

4–40
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Temperature Test Plugs For the calibration procedures, temperature test plugs are used with adapter
plugs (see Calibrating the Temperature Sensors on page 4–17).

Figure 4–31. TEST PLUG AND ADAPTER PLUGS

8 Pin Male
Adaptor Plug
Connector 9 Pin Male
Test Plug
Connector

Female
Connector
Chamber Temperature Chamber Temperature
Adaptor Plug (8-Pin) Adaptor Plug (9-Pin)
A00299-R

TEST PLUGS

Test plugs are available from Getinge/Castle, Inc.

Temperature Resistance Part No.

143.0°C (289.4°F) 154.70 ohms, 0.05% 517506

15.0°C (59.0°F) 105.85 ohms, 0.05% 517507

ADAPTER PLUGS

Adapter plugs are available from Getinge/Castle, Inc.

Adapter Mates With Part No.

Chamber Temperature J4 (8 pin) (see Figure 4–31) 61301602452

Jacket Temperature J3 (9 pin) (see Figure 4–31) 61301602453

Combination J3 and J4 (see Figure 4–32) 61301602980

61301609701 4–41
Calibration and Adjustments

Figure 4–32. COMBINATION ADAPTER PLUG

Pin 1

Test Plug

Combination
Adaptor Plug

8-Pin Connector 9-Pin Connector


Mates with J4 on Mates with J3 ON
CM1 Board CM1 Board
A03649-M

Pin 1 Pin 1

USING THE TEST PLUGS


To use a test plug, insert the test plug into the female connector
of the adapter plug, then insert the male connector into the
proper connector of the CM1 Board 2A2U (see Figure 4–33).

Figure 4–33. USING THE TEST PLUGS

J4

J3

Chamber Jacket
Temperature Temperature
Test Plug Test Plug
A00299-S

4–42
Section 5 Maintenance and Repair

INTRODUCTION

This section includes:


• Periodic maintenance schedule for the sterilizer
• Control system maintenance and repair procedures
• Piping system maintenance and repair procedures
• Door maintenance and repair procedures

Service Data Refer to the following drawings as necessary:


• Piping Schematics (see Section 8)
• Electrical Schematics (see Section 9)
• Roughing-In Drawings (see Section 10)

For detailed drawings of the assemblies, refer to the Parts Catalog (Pub. No.
61301609702).

61301609701 5–1
Maintenance and Repair

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE—STANDARD

BURN HAZARD/SHOCK HAZARD: Maintenance of this


WARNING
equipment involves working with electrical components and
steam and hot water supplies. Maintenance should be
performed by qualified personnel ONLY.

Provide preventive maintenance for the standard sterilizer at the intervals


specified.

RECOMMENDED
MAINTENANCE ITEM SEE PAGE
INTERVAL

Clean the Water and Steam Strainers EVERY THREE 5–23


MONTHS
Clean the Water Solenoid Valve
5–23

5–2
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

Replacing the Temperature Two temperature sensors and one pressure transducer are standard on this
Sensors (RTDs) equipment:
• Chamber RTD 1RT senses the chamber (drain) temperature.
• Jacket RTD 2RT senses the jacket temperature.
• Pressure transducer 1PT senses chamber pressure.

Be sure to insert the temperature sensors to the correct depth (see Figure
5–1. on page 5-4) so that they will give accurate temperature readings.

• BURN HAZARD: All steam lines will be hot! Shut off the main
WARNINGS
steam supply and depressurize steam in the system before
removing transducer probes. Ensure that all liquids are
drained from the system.
• SHOCK HAZARD: Turn OFF the mains circuit breaker before
replacing the transducer probes.

Wear a grounding strap at all times when inside the control box.
Otherwise, damage to the electronic components can result.

OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS
FOR HANDLING

SENSITIVE
DEVICES

CHAMBER (DRAIN) TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1RT

To replace chamber (drain) temperature sensor 1RT:


1. Loosen and remove the old temperature sensor.
2. Insert the new temperature sensor into the chamber sump.
3. Adjust the insertion depth to obtain the dimension shown in
Figure 5–1 on page 5-4.
4. Tighten the fitting.

61301609701 5–3
Maintenance and Repair

Figure 5–1. TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSERTION DEPTH

CHAMBER
DRAIN
5.00 ± .12"
5.00 ± .12"
Jacket RTD

Chamber RTD

JACKET

A09699-AN

JACKET TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2RT

To replace jacket temperature sensor 2RT:


1. Loosen and remove the old temperature sensor.
2. Insert the new temperature sensor into the jacket probe
fitting.
3. Adjust the insertion depth to obtain the dimension shown in
Figure 5–1.
4. Tighten the fitting.

CALIBRATION

Calibrate the transducer(s) after replacement. See “Calibrating the


Temperature Sensors” on page 4–17.

5–4
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Replacing the Pressure Each pressure transducer comes with a unique resistor set and a matching
Transducer data card.

When replacing the transducer, install the matching resistor set and enter
the data from its data card. Each data card includes the serial number (S–N)
of its matching pressure transducer, and bridge compensation values to
match it to the resistor set if required (see Figure 5–2).

Installation Sequence:
• REPLACE THE RESISTOR SET ALONG WITH THE PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
• ENTER NEW VALUES FROM THE DATA CARD
• CALIBRATE THE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
• SAVE RAM TO THE EPROM

Figure 5–2. PRESSURE TRANSDUCER DATA CARD

ELLER
ckmesstechnik
PE PAA-15/
NGE 0...5 bar
rie-Nr. BJ417

Pressure
Transducer

Data Card
Resistor
Set

WS-0137

61301609701 5–5
Maintenance and Repair

Each pressure transducer comes with a unique resistor set. In the rare
NOTE
event that a resistor set is separated from its pressure transducer, it is
important that the resistor set is rejoined with the same pressure transducer.

To rejoin a resistor set to the proper pressure transducer:


1. Check that the serial number (S–N) on the data card matches the serial
number of the pressure transducer.
2. Read the values from under the heading COMP on the data card.
3. Measure the proper resistors in the resistor set and compare them to the
COMP values. If the measurements equal the COMP values, the resistor
set is the correct one for this pressure transducer.

EXAMPLE
As an example, assume the resistor set is separated from the first pressure
transducer shown in Figure 5–2 on page 5–5. Proceed as follows:
1. Check that the serial number on the first data card, BJ417, matches the
one on the pressure transducer. (See Figure 5–2 on page 5–5.)
2. In the data card, values from under the heading COMP are R1=931
kOhm, R4=4.02 Ohm.
3. Measure the values of the resistors in positions R1 and R4 of the resistor
set. (See Figure 5–3 on page 5–7 for positions of resistors.) If the
measured values equal the COMP values from the data card, the resistor
set is the correct one for this pressure transducer.

NOTES
• A COMP value listed as 999.9 kOhms means there is no resistor in this
location.
• Other resistors may be in the resistor set. For this test, measure the
values of only those resistors listed on the data card under the heading
COMP.

5–6
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

REPLACE THE RESISTOR SET ALONG WITH THE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

Whenever replacing a pressure transducer:


NOTE
• Always replace the accompanying resistor set also.
• Store the Bridge Compensation Table reference card for future reference.
Losing this card may require replacing the pressure transducer again, if
future service is necessary.

1. Replace the pressure transducer and resistor set:


a. Loosen and remove the old pressure transducer.
b. Install the new pressure transducer.
c. Replace the old resistor set with the new set included
with the transducer. This set plugs into the analog input
section of CM1 Board (2U) marked K1.
d. Align notch to notch. See Figure 5–3.

Figure 5–3. REPLACING THE RESISTOR SET

CM1 Board (2U)

Pressure Transducer
Resistor Set
(R1 R2 R3 R4)
Can have any number of resistors
(R1–R4).
Align the rounded notch with the
notch in the socket.
Must be installed correctly for the
Notch unit to run properly.
Resistor
Set

A00299-F

1. Step A 1st

61301609701 5–7
Maintenance and Repair

ENTER NEW VALUES FROM THE DATA CARD


2. Enter the values from the data card as follows:
a. Press [SETUP].
CALIBRATION b. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password >
CALIBRATION > BRIDGE TABLES.
ACCESS REQUIRED The BRIDGE COMPENSATION screen appears.

Figure 5–4. BRIDGE COMPENSATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

BRIDGE COMPENSATION
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
TRANSDUCER SN J123 TABLE 1
RB GAIN OFFSET

2810 37.3 C 78.40 14.684.84


PSI
2938 78.40 4.65
3079 78.60 4.50
3233
3397
79.20
79.80 0
REMAINING TIME
4.31
4.13

CANCEL HOME ID NEXT OK


TABLE
WS-0067

c. Refer to the data card that comes with the pressure


transducer.
d. Press ID.
A data entry screen similar to the password screen
appears.
e. Enter the transducer serial number (S-N) from the data
card.
f. Enter the values for Rb, Gain, and Offset from the card:
g. Press [SAVE] when finished.
h. Store the data card for the new pressure transducer in
the control box for future reference.

5–8
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 5–5. ENTER THE BRIDGE COMPENSATION TABLE

Data Card ELLER


ckmesstechnik
PE PAA-15/
NGE 0...5 bar
rie-Nr. BJ417

Pressure
Transducer

Resistor
Set

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10
0 grv GRAVITY 1 00:00:00
01 S
STANDBY 00:24:15

BRIDGE
R COMPENSATION
TRANSDUCER
RA SN BJ417 TABLE 1
RB GAIN OFFSET
3680 85.40 3.83
3836 85.20 3.96
4010 85.30 3.95
4198 85.70 3.86
4399 86.30 3.59

CANCEL SAVE

WS-0138

61301609701 5–9
Maintenance and Repair

CALIBRATE THE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER


3. Perform “Calibrating the Pressure Transducer (In Situ
Method)” on page 4–8.

SAVE RAM TO THE EPROM


4. Save the RAM to the flash EPROM:
a. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE b. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SAVE
RAM TO FLASH.
ACCESS REQUIRED The SAVE RAM TO FLASH screen appears.

Figure 5–6. SAVE RAM TO FLASH SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

SAVE RAM TO FLASH


CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA

37.3 C 14.68 PSI

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME NO YES

WS-0081

5. Press [YES].
• The loading process takes approximately 10 to 15
seconds.
• During the loading process, a communication error
message appears.
6. If the screen displays an error message:
a. Verify that the EPROM is properly seated.
b. If necessary, replace the EPROM (see “Replacing the
Flash EPROM” on page 5–11).

5–10
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Replacing the Flash EPROM SPECIAL TOOLS


• Wrist strap, grounding
• PLCC extraction tool (P/N 61301603001)
• Non-conductive cold start tool

Observe handling precautions for devices sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic


Discharge) when working in the Control Box. Otherwise, damage to the
equipment could result:
OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS
FOR HANDLING • Always wear a grounding wrist strap when working in the Control Box or
SENSITIVE handling ESD-sensitive devices.
DEVICES
• Keep ESD-sensitive components in their static-shielding bags until it is
time to install them in the sterilizer.

IMPORTANT: Be sure to record the customer’s settings, pressure


CAUTION transducer data, calibration data, and sterilizer configuration settings
BEFORE removing the existing EPROM. This information is erased when
the CPU memory is cleared.

INSTALLATION SEQUENCE
1. “RECORD THE CUSTOMER’S SETTINGS” on page 5–12
2. “RECORD PRESSURE TRANSDUCER DATA” on page 5–14
3. “RECORD CALIBRATION DATA” on page 5–15
4. “RECORD THE STERILIZER CONFIGURATION” on page 5–16 (DIP
switch settings)
5. “REMOVE THE OLD EPROM” on page 5–16
6. “CLEAR THE CPU BOARD MEMORY (Cold Start)” on page 5–17
7. “INSTALL THE NEW EPROM” on page 5–18
8. “ENTER TRANSDUCER DATA AND CONFIGURATION SETTINGS”
on page 5–19
9. “ENTER THE CUSTOMER’ SETTINGS” on page 5–20
10. “SAVE RAM TO THE EPROM” on page 5–21
11. “VERIFY STERILIZER OPERATION” on page 5–22

61301609701 5–11
Maintenance and Repair

RECORD THE CUSTOMER’S SETTINGS

NOTE
Check if the customer has already written down the settings using the cycle
worksheets included in the 400/500HC Operator Manual.

There are two ways to record the customer’s cycle settings:


• Select each cycle, view the parameters, compare them with the factory
settings, and mark any changes on a cycle worksheet.
• Print out the cycle programs using the DOCUMENTATION menu (see
see “Printing a Program Listing” on page 7–28). The cycle programs can
be printed out individually.

Printing out all the cycle programs will take more than an hour. It may be
NOTE
more efficient to write down the settings using the cycle worksheets (see
“CYCLE TYPES” on page 1–15).

1. To manually record the cycle settings:


PARAMETER SETTINGS a. Press [SELECT CYCLE].
b. Write down the cycle assignments in the space
ACCESS REQUIRED provided in Figure 5–7 on page 5–13.
c. Select the first cycle.
d. Press [PARAMETERS] to view the cycle.
e. Compare the parameter settings with the factory
settings on the cycle worksheet. Write down any
changes.
f. Repeat steps b thru e for the other cycles.
2. Record the customer’s configuration menu settings:
a. Press [SETUP].
CONFIGURATION b. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password >
CONFIGURATION > MACHINE NAME.
ACCESS REQUIRED c. Write down the machine NAME on the worksheet
(Figure 5–7).
d. Press [OK].

5–12
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 5–7. CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET

CONFIGURATION Menu
MACHINE NAME NAME

LANGUAGE DATE UNITS LANGUAGE ENGLISH


DATE FORMAT MM/DD/YYYY DD/MM/YYYY YYYY/MM/DD
PRESSURE UNIT PSIA KPA BARS
TEMP UNIT ˚F ˚C

PANEL SETUP DEFAULT MENU DETAILS PLOT GRAPH BAR GRAPH


PARAMETER EDIT QUICK FULL
SCREEN SAVER Time: min.
CONFIRM SAVE/CANCEL YES NO

TIME SETTINGS Menu


Time MTWTFSS
ALARM CLOCK Utilities Off
Utilities On

CYCLE NAME CALIBRATION Menu


P01
P02 BRIDGE COMPENSATION
P03 Transducer ID
P04
RB GAIN OFFSET
P05
P06
P07
P08
P09
P10
P11
P12
MANUAL CALIBRATION
P13
P14 SENSOR GAIN OFFSET
P15 Chamber Temp
P16 Jacket Temp
P17 Chamber PSIA
P18
WS-0308A
P19
P20
P21
P22

61301609701 5–13
Maintenance and Repair

e. Select SYSTEM MENU > CONFIGURATION >


LANGUAGE DATE UNITS.
• If the sterilizer has foreign language software, write
down the LANGUAGE.
• Circle the DATE FORMAT.
• Circle the PRESSURE UNIT.
• Circle the TEMP UNIT.
f. Press [OK].
g. Select SYSTEM MENU > CONFIGURATION > PANEL
SETUP.
• Circle the DEFAULT MENU.
• Circle the PARAMETER EDIT mode.
• Write in the SCREENSAVER time.
• Circle the CONFIRM SAVE/CANCEL preference.
h. Press [OK].
CALENDAR i. Select SYSTEM MENU > TIME SETTINGS > ALARM
CLOCK.
ACCESS REQUIRED • Record the Utilities Off settings.
• Record the Utilities On settings.
j. Press [OK].

RECORD PRESSURE TRANSDUCER DATA


3. Find the data card for the pressure transducer. It is usually
inside the control box.
4. If you cannot find the card:
CALIBRATION a. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password >
CALIBRATION > BRIDGE TABLES.
ACCESS REQUIRED The BRIDGE COMPENSATION screen appears (see
Figure 5–4 on page 5–8).
b. Write down the bridge compensation table values (RB,
GAIN, and OFFSET) on the worksheet (see Figure 5–
7 on page 5–13).
c. Press [OK].

5–14
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

RECORD CALIBRATION DATA

Before starting, be sure the sterilizer door is open. This will ensure that the
NOTE
chamber pressure is at atmospheric.

5. Record the GAIN and OFFSET values for all the sensors:
a. Select SYSTEM MENU > CALIBRATION > MANUAL.
The MANUAL CALIBRATION screen appears.

Figure 5–8. MANUAL CALIBRATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
MANUAL CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUEPSIA

00 Chamber Temp 9.999 -894.9 87.5


37.3 C
01 Jacket Temp 9.999 -894.914.68
87.5PSI
03 Chamber PSIA 9.999 -88.13 11.85

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0066A

b. Write down the GAIN and OFFSET values for each


transducer (00 Chamber Temp, 01 Jacket Temp, 02
Load Temp, and 03 Chamber PSIA) on the worksheet
(Figure 5–7 on page 5–13).
c. Press [CANCEL] twice to return to the SYSTEM
MENU.

61301609701 5–15
Maintenance and Repair

RECORD THE STERILIZER CONFIGURATION

DIP SWITCHES 6. Print out the sterilizer configuration settings:


a. Select SYSTEM MENU > DIP SWITCHES.
ACCESS REQUIRED The DIP SWITCHES screen appears.

Figure 5–9. DIP SWITCHES SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
DIPSWITCHES
CHAMBER TEMP
DESCRIPTION STATUS CHAMBER PSIA

DS01 SD=0 DD=1 1


DS04 37.3 500=1
400=0 C 0 14.68 PSI
DS08 Utility S.D. 0
DS11 Parameter Check 0
DS12
DS13
DS14
Jacket Bypass
T-Doc
Water-Saver
0 0
REMAINING
0

0 TIME

CANCEL HOME PRINT OK

WS-0071A

b. Write down the switch settings or press [PRINT].

Only half of the switch settings are displayed at a time. Be sure to scroll
NOTE
down to view the remaining settings.

REMOVE THE OLD EPROM


7. Remove the old EPROM:
a. Unplug connector 2A4UP1 that is plugged into Filter
Board 4U located inside Control Box 2A (on the right).
b. Find socket A on CPU Board 1U in Control Box 2A.
c. Remove the existing EPROM using the PLCC
extraction tool (P/N 61301603001).

5–16
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 5–10. CPU BOARD 2A1U

Cold Start
Socket A Push Button

A B C CPU Board
2A1U

Pin 1

Flash EPROM

WS-0194

CLEAR THE CPU BOARD MEMORY (Cold Start)

The next step removes the existing program from the CPU Board memory.
NOTE

8. To remove the existing program from the CPU Board


memory:
a. Using your finger, press and hold the cold start button.
b. Plug in the connector 2A4UP1.
c. Continue to hold the cold start button until the Power
Up screen (GETINGE 3000) appears (about 10
seconds). Then release the button.

61301609701 5–17
Maintenance and Repair

INSTALL THE NEW EPROM


9. Install the new EPROM:
a. Verify the chamber door is open. (This will prevent the
alarm from sounding).
b. Unplug connector 2A4UP1.
c. Align the new memory IC in socket A.
• Orient the angled corner as shown
(see Figure 5–10 on page 5–17).
• Position the Pin 1 indent on the right.
d. Press the memory IC firmly into the socket until it
snaps into place.

LOAD THE PROGRAM


10. Load the program from the new EPROM:
a. Using your finger, press and hold the cold start button.
b. Plug in connector 2A4UP1.
c. Continue to hold the cold start button until the Power
Up screen (GETINGE) appears (about 10 seconds).
Then release the button.
d. Confirm that the SDN and version number on the
display are correct:
1)Press [SETUP].
2)Select [ABOUT].
3)Note the software version number on the ABOUT
screen. If the displayed software version number is
not correct, turn OFF the CONTROLS OFF/ON
switch. Then repeat step 2 above.
4)Adjust the brightness of the display if necessary.
See “Adjusting the Brightness of the Display” on
page 4–32.
11. Affix the label with the software version and SDN on the
PRODUCT SOFTWARE INSTALLED
Control Box cover.
Software Version:
61301602892 Rev. C

Soft. Doc. No. (SDN):

5–18
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

ENTER TRANSDUCER DATA AND CONFIGURATION SETTINGS


12. Enter the manual calibration data recorded on the
worksheet:
a. Verify the chamber door is open.
CALIBRATION b. Select SYSTEM MENU > CALIBRATION > MANUAL.
The MANUAL CALIBRATION screen appears (see
ACCESS REQUIRED Figure 5–8 on page 5–15).
c. Enter the GAIN and OFFSET values for each
transducer.
d. Press [SAVE] when finished.
13. Enter the bridge compensation tables from the pressure
transducer data card (or worksheet):
a. Select SYSTEM MENU > CALIBRATION > BRIDGE
TABLES.
The BRIDGE COMPENSATION screen appears (see
Figure 5–4 on page 5–8).
b. Enter the bridge compensation table data.
c. Press [SAVE] when finished.
14. Enter the sterilizer configuration (DIP switch) settings:
DIP SWITCHES a. Select SYSTEM MENU> DIPSWITCHES.
The DIPSWITCHES screen appears (see Figure 5–9
ACCESS REQUIRED on page 5–16).
b. Enter the settings from the printout.
c. Press [SAVE} when finished.

61301609701 5–19
Maintenance and Repair

ENTER THE CUSTOMER’ SETTINGS


15. Enter the customer’s cycle names and numbers:
CONFIGURATION a. Select SYSTEM MENU > CONFIGURATION > EDIT
CYCLES.
ACCESS REQUIRED The EDIT CYCLES screen appears.

Figure 5–11. EDIT CYCLES SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

EDIT CYCLES
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
1 vac PREVAC1
2 vac37.3
PREVAC1
C 14.68 PSI
3 vac PREVAC1
4 vac PREVAC2
5
6
7
vac PREVAC2
vac PREVAC3 0
vac B-D TEST REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

ws-0148

b. Enter the customer’s cycle names and numbers


(recorded on Figure 5–7 on page 5–13).
See “Changing the Cycle Name and Number” on
page 7–33.
c. Press [OK].
16. Select SYSTEM MENU > CONFIGURATION > MACHINE
NAME.
The MACHINE NAME screen appears.
a. Enter the machine name.
See “Assigning the Sterilizer Name” on page 7–34.
b. Press [OK].
17. Select SYSTEM MENU > CONFIGURATION >
LANGUAGE DATE UNITS.
The LANGUAGE DATE UNITS screen appears.
a. Enter the customer’s settings (recorded on Figure 5–7
on page 5–13).
See “Selecting the Language, Date Format, and Units”
on page 7–36.
b. Press [OK].

5–20
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

18. Select SYSTEM MENU > CONFIGURATION > PANEL


SETUP.
The PANEL SETUP screen appears.
a. Enter the customer’s settings
(recorded on Figure 5–7 on page 5–13).
See “Setting Up the Display Panel” on page 7–38.
b. Press [OK].
CALENDAR 19. Select SYSTEM MENU > TIME SETTINGS > ALARM
CLOCK.
ACCESS REQUIRED The ALARM CLOCK screen appears.
a. Enter the customer’s settings (recorded on Figure 5–7
on page 5–13).
See “Setting the Utilities Control ON and OFF Times”
on page 6–3.
b. Press [OK].
c. Press [CANCEL] twice to return to the SETUP menu.
20. Enter the customer’s cycle parameter settings.
See “Editing the Cycle Parameters (Quick Edit Mode)” on
page 7–15 or “Editing the Cycle Parameters (Full Edit
Mode)” on page 7–17 depending on the PARAMETER
EDIT setting.

SAVE RAM TO THE EPROM

SERVICE 21. Select SYSTEM MENU > SAVE RAM TO FLASH.


The SAVE RAM TO FLASH screen appears.
ACCESS REQUIRED
22. Press [YES].
• The loading process takes approximately 10 to 15
seconds.
• During the loading process, a communication error
message appears.
23. If an error message occurs:
• Verify that the EPROM is properly seated.
• If necessary, replace the EPROM (see “Replacing the
Flash EPROM” on page 5–11).

61301609701 5–21
Maintenance and Repair

VERIFY STERILIZER OPERATION


24. Verify that the pressure transducer is functioning properly.
To do this:
• Be sure the chamber door is open.
• Be sure the pressure on the display is approximately
equal to atmospheric pressure for your area (in PSIA).
25. Run test cycles to verify the operation of the sterilizer.
• The first cycle may abort before completion. Additional
cycles should run to completion.
• Process at least two successive cycles to verify proper
performance.

5–22
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

PIPING SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

Check the Pressure Relief Follow the directions on the tag attached to the pressure relief valve. When
Valve the jacket pressure exceeds 33 PSIG, operate the pressure release handle
of the pressure relief valve to ensure functioning of all moving parts.

AVOID BURNS: (1) Keep away from the outlet (discharge) end
WARNINGS
of the pressure relief valve when operating the pressure
release handle. (2) The handle on the pressure release valve
may be hot. Wear protective gloves when operating the valve.

Clean the Water and Steam Remove the screen from the strainer. Clean it with a stiff brush or suitable
Strainers instrument.

Figure 5–12. STRAINER ASSEMBLY

OUT

IN
Screen

Cap
350470JD

Clean the Water Solenoid Disassemble and clean the interior parts of the water solenoid valve.
Valve

61301609701 5–23
Maintenance and Repair

Replace the Air Filter The air filter provides a filtration rate of 99.97% efficiency for 0.3 micron
particles and droplets. Replace the complete air filter after an AIR IN SHOW
diagnostic message. The filter has a threaded NPT fitting and only needs to
be hand-tightened.

Figure 5–13. AIR FILTER

¾-14 NPT Air Filter


Fitting

A00298QR

5–24
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

DOOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR

Opening the Door Manually Manual gasket retraction may be necessary if access to the chamber is
(Manual Gasket Retract) required and UNSEAL DOOR is inoperative.

• DO NOT attempt to open the sterilizer chamber door unless


WARNINGS
the CHAMBER pressure gauge reads zero (0 psig). Hot
steam can cause serious injury.
• If a WATER IN DRAIN message is displayed, DO NOT open
the chamber door manually. Hot water in the chamber may
spill if the door is opened. Wait until the message clears
before attempting to open the door.

PREPARATION
1. Turn OFF the steam supply.
2. Turn OFF power to the sterilizer at the power source (circuit
breaker on sterilizer power box).

REMOVE PRESSURE FROM THE GASKET


3. Locate the water solenoid valve on the left side of the
sterilizer.

Figure 5–14. WATER SOLENOID VALVE AND HAND VALVES

Water to Ejector
Solenoid Valve
VACUUM TO DOOR(S)
Manual Ball Valve
Operation Rod

STEAM TO DOOR(S)
Ball Valve
A09700-J

61301609701 5–25
Maintenance and Repair

4. Turn the water solenoid valve ON.


a. Push the white rod in.
b. Rotate clockwise.
The water flow creates a vacuum to retract the gasket.

View the CHAMBER pressure gauge while the steam bleeds


WARNING
from the chamber. Wait until the pressure is at zero (0 psig)
before operating the hand valve. Hot steam can cause serious
injury.

5. Locate the STEAM TO DOOR(S) hand valve on the right


side of the sterilizer.
6. Close the STEAM TO DOOR(S) valve.
7. Open the VACUUM TO DOOR(S) valve.
This diverts the steam from the gasket to the drain and
opens the vacuum line to retract the gasket.

REMOVE THE LOAD


8. Manually open the control end (CE) door for access to the
chamber.

Before removing the load, manually lower the door


WARNING
approximately one inch to allow residual steam to escape.
Stand back to avoid possible burns when lowering the door.

9. After the load is removed, close the door.

RESTORE PRESSURE TO THE GASKET


10. With the sterilizer door closed, close the VACUUM TO
DOOR(S) valve.

To avoid injury, DO NOT open the hand valves with the


WARNING
chamber door open.

11. Open the STEAM TO DOOR(S) valve.


12. Turn the water solenoid valve counter-clockwise.
a. Rotate the white rod counter-clockwise.
b. Release the white rod.
13. Turn the steam supply and electrical power back on.

5–26
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Door Gasket Replacement 1. Swing open the front panel. Remove the hex nut and
rubber door stop bumper from the lower frame cross
member.

Figure 5–15. REMOVING LOWER DOOR STOP BUMPER

LOWER
DOOR STOP
BUMPER

DOOR OPEN
SWITCH
(POWER DOOR ONLY)

Do not use sharp instruments or tools that may scratch the headring when
CAUTION removing the gasket.

2. Allow the sterilizer to cool before removing the gasket.


Remove the gasket by pulling it out of the headring gasket
groove, with the door at the fully lowered position. (Start at
the splice when pulling out the gasket.)

61301609701 5–27
Maintenance and Repair

3. Clean the gasket groove with alcohol to remove any foreign


material that may have collected in the groove.

Figure 5–16. REPLACING DOOR GASKET


SPLICE

A00297-F

4. Install the new gasket:


a. Ensure the replacement door gasket is clean.
b. Place the gasket splice at the top center of the gasket
groove and press it into place (1).
c. Divide its length evenly and press the gasket into place
at the bottom center of the gasket groove (2).
d. Press the gasket, evenly divided, into the center of the
gasket groove on the sides (3, 4), and then the four
corners (5-8).
e. Make sure that the gasket is fully recessed to prevent
damage by the door.

5–28
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

If using a U-shaped gasket, be sure that the gasket is not twisted and that
CAUTION
the open end is facing into the unit. If using a round gasket, gasket
orientation is not required.

Figure 5–17. GASKET ORIENTATION

CORRECT ORIENTATION OF
U-SHAPED GASKET

FRONT OF
STERILIZER

CROSS SECTIONAL VIEW


OF GASKET HEADRING

A0 0619-A

5. Replace the rubber bumper and front trim panel.


6. Press Unseal Door switch to pull gasket in completely.

The door latch will not support the weight of the door. Support
WARNING the weight with blocking under it or secure the door casting to
the sterilizer body bottom engagement lug with the shipping
spacer, washer, lockwasher and 1/4” screw. This will avoid
injury or sterilizer damage from a free-falling door.

61301609701 5–29
Maintenance and Repair

Replace And Adjust the Replace the cable as follows:


Door Cable
1. Remove the lower front trim panel from the sterilizer. Lift
and pull on the panel for removal.
2. Remove the side panel for access to the pulley on cabinet
models.

Figure 5–18. DOOR CABLE ASSEMBLY

Door Pulley

Door Cover
Screw and Washer

Cable Clamp
Spacer 90921
Cable
Shipping Flat Washer E6974
Hardware
Lockwasher E4671
Turnbuckle
Screw E0108

Weight

Shipping Hardware Weight Guide


Part # Description Size
090921 SPACER, POLY 1.15ID x 1.75OD x .37 Frame
E6974 WSHR, FLT .25 x 1.75 x .12 THK, ZINC
E4671 WSHR, LOCK, SPR .25ND,SST
A09701-N
E0108 SCR, HEX HD, CAP .25-.20 x .63 SST

3. Assemble the cable over the pulley. Secure the cable


clamp to door extension block with screw and washer.
4. Assemble the cable turnbuckle to the door weight.
5. After assembly, adjust the door cables and counterbalance
weights as outline in (see Door Counterbalance Weight
Adjustment on page 4-36).

5–30
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Replacing the Door Spacers In order to replace the door spacers, the door plate is removed and the
counter-weight is disengaged. The following instructions provide the
necessary steps to safely replace the door spacers.

POSSIBILITY OF INJURY: Use caution when removing the


WARNING
door plate, it weighs approximately 75 lbs. Two people may be
needed to perform this procedure.

1. Remove the lower front trim panel from the sterilizer. Lift
and pull on the panel for removal.
2. Remove the hex nut and rubber door stop bumper from the
lower frame cross member

Figure 5–19. REMOVING LOWER DOOR STOP BUMPER

LOWER
DOOR STOP
BUMPER

DOOR OPEN
SWITCH
(POWER DOOR ONLY)

61301609701 5–31
Maintenance and Repair

The door latch will not support the weight of the door. Support
WARNING
the weight of the door with blocking under it or secure the door
casting to the sterilizer body bottom engagement lug with the
shipping spacer, washer, lockwasher and 1/4" screw. This will
avoid injury or sterilizer damage from a free falling door.

3. Secure the door plate to the sterilizer body bottom engage-


ment lug using the shipping hardware.

Figure 5–20. DOOR CABLE ASSEMBLY

Door Pulley

Door Cover
Screw and Washer

Cable Clamp
Spacer 90921
Cable
Shipping Flat Washer E6974
Hardware
Lockwasher E4671
Turnbuckle
Screw E0108

Weight

Shipping Hardware Weight Guide


Part # Description Size
090921 SPACER, POLY 1.15ID x 1.75OD x .37 Frame
E6974 WSHR, FLT .25 x 1.75 x .12 THK, ZINC
E4671 WSHR, LOCK, SPR .25ND,SST
A09701-N
E0108 SCR, HEX HD, CAP .25-.20 x .63 SST

4. Block up the counterweight to prevent any strain on the


door cable.
5. Remove the side panel for access to the pulley on cabinet
models.
6. Remove the cable bracket from both sides of the door.
a. Remove Phillips head screw, washer and lock washer
from the cable door panel support.
b. Remove the hex head screw, hex nut, and lock washer
from the cable bracket.

5–32
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

7. Remove the hex nut, lock washer and washer holding the
door track mounting bracket to the frame.

There is a door track mounting bracket on both sides of the door.


NOTE

Figure 5–21. REMOVING CABLE BRACKET & DOOR TRACK MOUNTING


BRACKET & REPLACING DOOR SPACERS

Door Spacer

Cable Bracket &


Cable Door Panel Support

Door Channel
Frame

Door Track Mounting


Bracket

A00298qs

8. Holding onto the door handle, remove the shipping hard-


ware and carefully lower the door.

61301609701 5–33
Maintenance and Repair

9. Manually pull the door channel, at the base of the unit,


away from the door far enough to allow the door and
square door spacer to clear the channel.
10. Replace the door spacers as required.
a. Remove the Phillips head screw.
b. Remove the worn spacer.
c. Position the new spacer and secure using the Phillips
head screw. Be sure to locktite all screws that secure
the spacers in place.
11. Manually pull the door channel open enough to allow the
door and door spacer to clear the channel.
12. Pull the door plate to the closed position.
13. Secure the door plate to the sterilizer body bottom
engagement lug using the shipping hardware.
14. Install the door track mounting bracket on both sides of the
door channel and to the frame.
15. Install the cable bracket and door panel support on both
sides of the door.
16. Adjust the door cables and counterbalance weights as
outlined (see Door Counterbalance Weight Adjustment on
page 4-36).
17. Remove the shipping hardware used to secure the door
plate in the closed position.

If the door channel is removed or adjusted, check the door plate to gasket
NOTE
ring gap at the four corners of the chamber. Refer to the section entitled
Align the Door in the 400/500 Series Steam Sterilizers Service Manual, Part
No. 61301608209.

18. Install the side panels on cabinet model sterilizers.


19. Install the rubber bumper and front trim panel.

5–34
Section 6 Optional Equipment & Features

INTRODUCTION

This section includes service information for the following sterilizer options:
• Utilities Control Feature (see page 6–2)
• Parameter Check Feature (see page 6–5)

Utility control and parameter check are built-in software features that are
enabled or disabled from the DIPSWITCHES menu.

61301609701 6–1
Optional Equipment & Features

UTILITIES CONTROL FEATURE

The Utilities Control feature turns the steam supply to the jacket ON and
OFF at scheduled times each day. If a cycle is in progress at the alarm time,
utilities shutdown will occur when the cycle ends.

NOTE
Utility S.D. switch DS08 must be set to 1 for the utilities control feature to
operate (see “Enabling the Sterilizer Options” on page 4–27). The Utilities
Control feature does not require any additional hardware; the timer is built
into the control software but must be enabled before it can be used.

Figure 6–1. UTILITIES CONTROL FEATURE

Set Utility Control OFF Time and Set Utility Control ON Time and
Days of Week on ALARM CLOCK Screen Days of Week on ALARM CLOCK Screen
00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15

ALARM CLOCK ALARM CLOCK


CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
(HH:MM) MTWTFSS (HH:MM) MTWTFSS

37.3 C
Auto Blow-down
Utilities Off
Utilities On
17:00
19:30
06:00
14.68 PSI
1010100
1111100
0111110
+ 37.3 C
Auto Blow-down
Utilities Off
Utilities On
17:00
19:30
06:00
14.68 PSI
1010100
1111100
0111110

0
REMAINING TIME
0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL HOME OK

ws-0024 ws-0024

Display 3A Steam to Jacket


Valve 8SV

Steam to Jacket (DO07)

Control Box 2A 8JO

Boiler ON (DO06) Steam Boiler 17A


7JO

A08209-C

6–2
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Setting the Utilities Control To set the utilities control ON and OFF times:
ON and OFF Times
1. Press [SETUP].
CALENDAR 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > TIME
SETTINGS > ALARM CLOCK.
ACCESS REQUIRED • The ALARM CLOCK screen appears.

Figure 6–2. ALARM CLOCK SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

ALARM CLOCK
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
(HH:MM) MTWTFSS

37.3 C
Utilities Off 19:30 14.68 PSI
1111100
Utilities On 03:00 1111100

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0023

3. Select the Utilities Off time field.


a. Press [ENTER].
b. Enter the desired utilities OFF time.
c. Press [ENTER].
4. Select Monday (M).
a. Press [ENTER].
b. Use the up or down arrow, to enable (1) or disable (0)
auto utilities control for that day.
c. Press [ENTER].
d. Use the left and right arrows to select the next day of
the week.
e. Repeat steps a thru d for the other days of the week.
5. Select the Utilities On time field.
a. Repeat steps 3 and 4.
b. Press [SAVE] when finished.

61301609701 6–3
Optional Equipment & Features

There can be only be one Utilities Off and one Utilities On time each day.
NOTE
Once Utilities Off is activated, Utilities On cannot be activated until the next
day.

Bypassing Utility Shutdown When Utility Shutdown is activated, the control panel displays UTILITY
Mode SHUTDOWN. The operator can bypass this mode in order to run a single
cycle.

To bypass utility shutdown mode for one cycle:


1. Press START.
• Utility Shutdown mode is bypassed.
• The sterilizer begins to warm up.
2. Press START to begin the cycle.
• The cycle runs to completion.
• The controls automatically revert to UTILITY SHUTDOWN.

6–4
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

PARAMETER CHECK FEATURE

Each cycle has a minimum parameter check value based on the factory set
parameters (see Table 6–1 on page 6–5). If a user selects cycle settings
that are below this value, a red LOW CYCLE VALUES and a blue ENTER
TO EDIT message appear.

The parameter check value is derived from a theoretical value based on the
factory set exposure time and temperature. For example, the parameter
check value for a Prevac 1 cycle is 73.4; that is, a 3 minute exposure at
275°F is equivalent to 73.4 minutes (73:24) at 250°F.

NOTES
• Parameter Check switch DS11 must be set to 1 for the parameter check
feature to operate (see “Enabling the Sterilizer Options” on page 4–27).
• The LOW CYCLE VALUES condition does not prevent the cycle from
starting. If the operator chooses to run the cycle without adjusting the
cycle parameters, LOW CYCLE VALUES will be printed. The message
will disappear while in cycle. After the cycle, when the controls return to
standby mode, the message will reappear.

Table 6–1. Parameter Check Values

CYCLE FIXED PARAMETER CHECK VALUE

PREVAC1 73.4
PREVAC3

B-D TEST 49.0

GRAVITY1 29.9

GRAVITY2 245.1

FLASH 3+ 73.4

FLASH 10+ 245.1

LIQUIDS1 N/A

LEAK TEST 29.8

The parameter check value is a fixed limit that is compared to actual


NOTE
parameter check value whenever the operator selects a new cycle or
adjusts the exposure time or temperature. The factory shipped Parameter
Check value is 0.1 higher than the fixed limit value shown in Table 6–1 (the
B-D Test cycle is 17.6 higher).

61301609701 6–5
Optional Equipment & Features

Estimating Valid Cycle The graphs in this section provide a visual means of determining whether a
Parameters specific cycle setting is above the parameter check limit.

Refer to Figure 6–3. On the graph, exposure temperature is measured on


the x-axis and exposure time on the y-axis. The parameter check limit for
the Gravity 1 cycle is the solid diagonal line. The shaded area indicates
cycle settings that will result in a LOW CYCLE VALUE message.

Note that the y-axis (exposure time) is a logarithmic scale. The divisions on
NOTE
the y-axis are not evenly spaced. For example, the number 15 is not exactly
between 10 and 20, but closer to 20 than to 10.

Figure 6–3. PARAMETER CHECK EXAMPLE

100
Exposure Time (minutes)

20 min. @ 255˚F
(above limit)

10 min. @ 260˚F
10 (above limit)

10 min. @ 255˚F
(below limit)

GRAVITY 1
(Parameter Check
1 Limit = 29.9)

230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275
A09133-D2
20
Exposure Temperature (˚F)
19
18
17
16
15
14
13

12

11

10

DETAIL OF
LOGARITHMIC SCALE

6–6
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

For example, selecting 10 minutes exposure at 255°F results in a LOW


CYCLE VALUE message. To find an exposure time above the parameter
check limit follow the line (horizontally or vertically) until it crosses the
diagonal. In this example, 20 minutes at 255°F or 10 minutes at 260°F are
above the parameter check limit.

Figure 6–4. GRAVITY 1 CYCLE

100
Exposure Time (minutes)

10

GRAVITY 1
(Parameter Check
1 Limit = 29.9)

230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275
Exposure Temperature (˚F) A09133-E1

61301609701 6–7
Optional Equipment & Features

Figure 6–5. GRAVITY 2 CYCLE

100
Exposure Time (minutes)

10 GRAVITY 2
(Parameter Check
Limit = 245.1)

1
230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275
Exposure Temperature (˚F) A09133-E2

Figure 6–6. FLASH 3+ CYCLE

100
Exposure Time (minutes)

10

FLASH 3+
(Parameter Check
Limit = 73.4)

1
230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275
Exposure Temperature (˚F) A09701-G

6–8
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 6–7. FLASH 10+ CYCLE

100
Exposure Time (minutes)

FLASH 10+
10 (Parameter Check
Limit = 245.1)

1
230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275
Exposure Temperature (˚F) A09701-F

Figure 6–8. PREVAC CYCLE

100
Exposure Time (minutes)

10

PREVAC
(Parameter Check
Limit = 73.4)

1
230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275
Exposure Temperature (˚F) A09133-H1

61301609701 6–9
Optional Equipment & Features

Figure 6–9. B-D TEST CYCLE

100
Exposure Time (minutes)

10

B-D TEST
(Parameter Check
Limit = 49.0)

230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275
Exposure Temperature (˚F) A09133-H2

6–10
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

WATER-SAVER

Both the MP-129A (designed for the M/C 3500 series) and MP-129F
(designed for the 400/500 series) water-savers are compatible with the
433HCMC and 533HCMC control system.
• If the water-saver is an MP-129A, the Water to Ejector output (DO 05) is
routed to the water-saver and the water-saver is operated by a pressure
switch located in the sterilizer piping.
• If the water-saver is an MP-129F, the controls monitor the chamber
pressure and operate the Water to Ejector (DO 05) and Water-Saver ON
(DO 14) outputs directly.

Refer to the User Manual supplied with the water-saver for maintenance
information.

61301609701 6–11
Optional Equipment & Features

6–12
Section 7 Service Menu

INTRODUCTION

RISK OF INEFFECTIVE CYCLES AND OPERATOR INJURY.


WARNING
Do not attempt to use an unauthorized software security code
to tamper with the controls during the installation or service of
this equipment. Whenever a problem cannot be corrected
using authorized software security codes, contact Getinge USA
Technical Services personnel. Tampering by any means, to
include the use of an unauthorized software security code,
could constitute termination of employment with Getinge USA,
Inc., and could be a violation of Federal law.

The section contains:


• A list of tasks that can be performed using the service menu
• Instructions on how to navigate the display and enter information
• A description of the three softkeys available from the process screen:
[SETUP], [SELECT CYCLE], and [PARAMETERS]
• A description of the SYSTEM MENU and its submenus.

The display panel consists of the LCD screen, five function buttons
(softkeys), directional arrows, and ENTER button.

Figure 7–1. DISPLAY PANEL

LCD Screen

Softkeys
!

WS-0341

Directional Arrows ENTER Button

61301609701 7–1
Service Menu

What You Can Do From the Tasks that can be performed from the display panel, along with the menu
Display Panel path are listed in Table 7–1.

NOTE Most tasks require a password with a specific access area enabled. See
“Password Access” on page 1–29 for a list of access areas.

Table 7–1. Display Panel Tasks

TASK SOFTKEY MENU PATH PAGE

Selecting the Process Screen (Details) [SETUP] Not Applicable 7-10

Selecting the Process Screen (Plot 7-10


Graph)

Selecting the Process Screen (Bar 7-11


Graph)

Viewing the About Screen 7-13

Selecting a Cycle [SELECT Not Applicable 7-14


CYCLE]

View the Cycle Parameters [PARA- Not Applicable 7-15


METERS]
Editing the Cycle Parameters (Quick 7-15
Edit Mode)

Editing the Cycle Parameters (Full Edit 7-17


Mode)

Setting the Clock and Calendar [SETUP] SYSTEM > TIME SETTINGS > CALENDAR 7-20

Setting the Alarm Clock SYSTEM > TIME SETTINGS > ALARM CLOCK

Calibrating the Temperature Sensors [SETUP] SYSTEM > CALIBRATION > AUTOMATIC 7-22
and Pressure Transducer (Automatic)

Calibrating the Temperature Sensors SYSTEM > CALIBRATION > MANUAL 7-23
and Pressure Transducer (Manual)

Entering the Bridge Compensation SYSTEM > CALIBRATION > BRIDGE TABLES 7-24
Table Data

Printing a Program Listing [SETUP] SYSTEM > DOCUMENTATION > PRINT CYCLE 7-26
SETUP

Setting Up the Printer Log Interval SYSTEM > DOCUMENTATION > PRINTER 7-27

SettingUp the Printer Log Values Defi- SYSTEM > DOCUMENTATION > PRINT LOG VAL- 7-28
nition UES

7–2
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Table 7–1. Display Panel Tasks

TASK SOFTKEY MENU PATH PAGE

Changing the Cycle Name and Num- [SETUP] SYSTEM > CONFIGURATION > EDIT CYCLES 7-31
ber

Assigning the Sterilizer Name SYSTEM > CONFIGURATION > NAME 7-32

Select the Language [SETUP] SYSTEM > CONFIGURATION > LANGUAGE DATE 7-32
UNIT
Select the Date Format 7-34

Select the Temperature Unit 7-35

Select the Pressure Unit 7-35

SettingUp the Display Panel [SETUP] SYSTEM > CONFIGURATION > PANEL SETUP 7-36

Configuring Password Access for Indi- [SETUP] SYSTEM > PASSWORD 7-39
vidual Users

Configure the Sterilizer [SETUP] SYSTEM > DIPSWITCHES 7-41

Viewing the Error Log [SETUP] SYSTEM > SERVICE > ERROR LOG 7-43

View the Analog Inputs [SETUP] SYSTEM > SERVICE > DIAGNOSTIC > ANALOG 7-45
INPUT

View the Digital Inputs SYSTEM > SERVICE > DIAGNOSTIC > DIGITAL 7-46
INPUT

Operating the Digital Ouptuts SYSTEM > SERVICE > DIAGNOSTIC > DIGITAL 7-47
OUTPUT

View the User Flags SYSTEM > SERVICE > DIAGNOSTIC > USER 7-48
FLAGS

View the System Flags SYSTEM > SERVICE > DIAGNOSTIC > SYSTEM 7-49
FLAGS

Test the Printer SYSTEM > SERVICE > DIAGNOSTIC > PRINTER 7-50

Test the LEDs SYSTEM > SERVICE > DIAGNOSTIC > LED/ 7-50
BUZZER

Save RAM to the EPROM [SETUP] SYSTEM > SAVE RAM TO FLASH 7-51

61301609701 7–3
Service Menu

NAVIGATION BASICS

Selecting an Item To select an item from a menu list:

1. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to select the item.

2. Press ENTER.

Figure 7–2. MENU LIST

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA


DETAILS
PLOT GRAPH
37.3 CTEMP
CHAMBER 14.68 PSI
BAR GRAPH
SYSTEM MENU
ABOUT
0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL

WS-0039

NOTE If all the items in the list do not fit on one screen, a black bar will appear to
the right of the list. Use the down arrow to view the additional items.

7–4
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Entering a Password (or When a password is required (or an alphanumeric value needs to be
Alphanumeric Value) entered), a screen similar to the password entry screen appears.

Figure 7–3. PASSWORD ENTRY

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z Å Ä Ö Ü
! " # % & ( ) \ , ;
. : + SPACE - / =

CANCEL DELETE OK

WS-0017

To enter a password or change a parameter value:


1. Use the arrows to select the first character.

2. Press ENTER.
The password character is indicated by a pound sign (#).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for additional characters.

NOTE If you make a mistake, press [DELETE] to erase the last character.

4. Press [OK] when all characters have been entered.

61301609701 7–5
Service Menu

Entering a Data Value When a data value (e.g., cycle setting, calibration value, etc.) needs to be
entered, a popup menu appears.

Figure 7–4. DATA ENTRY

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
EDIT PARAMETERS
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
A Exposure Time
A
37.3 C (00:01:00 - 06:00:00)14.68 PSI
A
A 0 hh:mm:ss
A p p
0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL

WS-0018 HC

To enter a data value:

1. Press ENTER.
The last digit of the value will blink.
2. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to increase or decrease the
digit.

Use the LEFT and RIGHT arrows to move from digit to


digit.

3. Press ENTER.
4. Press [SAVE].
The CONFIRM SAVE? YES OR NO prompt appears.

NOTE If desired, the CONFIRM SAVE? prompt can be turned off by changing the
CONFIRM SAVE/CANCEL setting on the PANEL SETUP screen (see page
7–36.)

5. Press [YES].
6. Press [OK].

7–6
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Selecting a Setup Option Some fields have multiple choice setup options (e.g., temperature and
pressure units setup).

Figure 7–5. SETUP OPTIONS

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

LANGUAGE DATE UNITS


CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
DATE FORMAT
37.3 C MM/DD/YYYY14.68 PSI
PRESSURE UNIT PSI
TEMP UNIT C

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0019

To select a setup option:

1. Use the arrows to select the field to be changed.

2. Press ENTER.

3. Use the UP or DOWN arrow to switch between choices.

4. Press ENTER.
5. Press [SAVE].
The [CONFIRM SAVE? YES OR NO] prompt appears.
6. Press [YES].
7. Repeat steps 1 thru 6 for other setup options.
8. Press [OK] when finished.

61301609701 7–7
Service Menu

Exiting a Display Screen There are three commands that are used to exit a display screen:
[CANCEL], [HOME], and [OK].

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0158

To exit from a display screen:

• Press [CANCEL] to return to the previous screen.


• Press [HOME] to return to the process screen.
If a screen has both [OK] and [CANCEL] buttons:
• Press [OK] to return to the previous screen.
Use this button when you have completed the desired task.
• Press [CANCEL] to return to the previous screen.
Use this button if you want to exit a screen (e.g., if you
selected a screen by mistake).

7–8
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

SETUP SOFTKEY

SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL


CYCLE METER
WS-0338

When the SETUP softkey is pressed, the SETUP MENU appears. The
SETUP MENU (see Figure 7–6) has five items:
• DETAILS — see page 7–10.
• PLOT GRAPH — see page 7–10.
• BAR GRAPH — see page 7–11.
• SYSTEM MENU — see page 7–12.
• ABOUT — see page 7–13.

Figure 7–6. SETUP MENU

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA


DETAILS
PLOT GRAPH
37.3 CTEMP
CHAMBER 14.68 PSI
BAR GRAPH
SYSTEM MENU
ABOUT
0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL

WS-0039

NOTE A password is required for access to the SYSTEM MENU selections.


Individual passwords have specific access privileges (See “Password
Access” on page 1–29) For example, a user may be given access to the
CALENDAR and CONFIGURATION menus but not the SERVICE MENU.

61301609701 7–9
Service Menu

Selecting the Process Screen The user has the option of selecting one of three process screens: the
normal process screen (DETAILS), a screen with a graphical display (PLOT
GRAPH) or a screen with an enlarged timer (BAR GRAPH). A password is
not required to select the process screen.

DETAILS

To select the Details process screen:

1. Press [SETUP].
2. Select DETAILS.
3. Press ENTER.
The Details screen (Figure 7–7) appears.

Figure 7–7. DETAILS SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY 1 01:36:36


02 CYCL COMPLETE 00:04:34

Chamber Temp 61.2 C


Chamb Press/PSIG 0.00 PSI
Jacket Temp 122.3 C
Atmosphere PSIA 14.37 PSI
Chamber PSIA 14.35 PSI
Exp. Temp Max 121.7 C
Exp. Temp Min 121.4 C

SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL


CYCLE METER
WS-0012

PLOT GRAPH

To select the Plot Graph process screen:

1. Press [SETUP].
2. Select PLOT GRAPH.
3. Press ENTER.
The Plot Graph screen appears (Figure 7–8).

7–10
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 7–8. PLOT GRAPH SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY 1 01:36:36


02 CYCL COMPLETE 00:03:42
ChamberTemp 81.2 C
Chamber PSIA 14.35 PSI

Time
01:40

SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL


CYCLE METER
WS-0013 700HC

BAR GRAPH

To select the Bar Graph process screen:

1. Press [SETUP]
2. Select BAR GRAPH.
3. Press ENTER.
The Bar Graph screen (Figure 7–9) appears.

Figure 7–9. BAR GRAPH SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA

37.3 C 14.68 PSI

0
REMAINING TIME

SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL


CYCLE METER
WS-0014

61301609701 7–11
Service Menu

Accessing the System Menu The SYSTEM MENU lists the service features of the control software. A
password (with specific area access) is required to use these features.

To access the SYSTEM MENU:

1. Press [SETUP]
2. Select SYSTEM MENU.
3. Press ENTER.
The ENTER PASSWORD screen appears.
4. Enter your password (see page 7–5).
The SYSTEM MENU (Figure 7–10) appears.

Figure 7–10. SYSTEM MENU

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA


DETAILS
TIME SETTINGS
PLOT GRAPH
CALIBRATION
37.3 CTEMP
CHAMBER 14.68 PSI
DOCUMENTATION
BAR GRAPH
SYSTEMCONFIGURATION
MENU

0
PASSWORDS
ABOUT
DIP SWITCHES

REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME

WS-0032A

5. Refer to “SYSTEM MENU” on page 7–19 for a description


of the SYSTEM MENU and its submenus.

7–12
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Viewing the About Screen The ABOUT screen lists the software version and other pertinent
information about the sterilizer.

To view the ABOUT screen:

1. Press [SETUP].
2. Select ABOUT.
3. Press ENTER.
The ABOUT screen (Figure 7–11) appears.

Figure 7–11. ABOUT SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

ABOUT
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
Getinge PACS 3000
PANEL Version: 3.05
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
PACS Version: 3.08
PROM Update: 9/1/2004
SDN:
Model No.:
0 61301609674
400-500 HCMC
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME BRIGHT BRIGHT OK


DEC INC
WS-0035 400-500 HCMC

NOTE The ABOUT screen is also used to adjust the brightness of the display (see
page 4–31).

4. Press [OK] when finished.

61301609701 7–13
Service Menu

SELECT CYCLE SOFTKEY

SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL


CYCLE METER
WS-0339

Selecting a Cycle To select a cycle:

1. Press [SELECT CYCLE].


The SELECT CYCLE screen (Figure 7–12) appears.

Figure 7–12. SELECT CYCLE SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

SELECT CYCLE
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
P08 grv GRAVITY1
P09 grv37.3
GRAVITY1
C 14.68 PSI
P10 grv GRAVITY1
P11 grv GRAVITY2
P12
P13
P14
grv GRAVITY2
grv GRAVITY2 0
f 3 FLASH 3+ REMAINING TIME

CANCEL OK

ws-0016 400_500HC

2. Use the UP and DOWN arrows to select the cycle.


3. Press ENTER.
The process screen for the selected cycle appears.

7–14
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

PARAMETER SOFTKEY

SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL


CYCLE METER
WS-0340

The cycle parameters can be edited by users with Parameter Settings


password access.

The parameters display is configured for either Quick Edit or Full Edit.
• Quick Edit allows the user to change the exposure time, exposure tem-
perature, and drying time without using the EDIT PARAMETERS
screen.
• Full Edit provides access to all adjustable parameters.

To set up the display for Quick Edit or Full Edit, see “Setting Up the Display
NOTE
Panel” on page 7–36.

Editing the Cycle Parameters To edit the cycle parameters:


(Quick Edit Mode)
1. Press [PARAMETER].
The ENTER PASSWORD screen appears.
PARAMETER SETTINGS 2. Enter your password.
The Exposure Time field of the process screen is
ACCESS REQUIRED highlighted (Figure 7–13).

Figure 7–13. QUICK EDIT SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
EDIT PARAMETERS
A ExposureTEMP
CHAMBER Time 00:30:00 CHAMBER PSIA
A Dry 1=vac 2=grav 2
A Drying
37.3 Time
C 00:30:00 14.68 PSI
A Exposure Temp 121.1 C

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL MORE OK
PARAMS
WS-0033 733HC

61301609701 7–15
Service Menu

3. Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow, select Exposure Time,


Exposure Temp, or Drying Time.
4. Press ENTER.
A popup screen (Figure 7–14) for the selected parameter
appears. The last digit is blinking.

Figure 7–14. CYCLE PARAMETER POPUP SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
EDIT PARAMETERS
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
A Exposure Time
A
37.3 C (00:01:00 - 06:00:00)14.68 PSI
A
A 0 hh:mm:ss
A p p
0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL

WS-0018 HC

5. Use the arrow keys to select the desired setting.


6. Press ENTER.
7. Press [SAVE].
8. Repeat steps 4 thru 6 for other parameters.

To edit a parameter other than Exposure Time, Exposure Temp, or Drying


NOTE
Time, press MORE PARAMS and follow the procedure for Full Edit on page
7-17.

9. Press [OK] when finished.

7–16
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Editing the Cycle Parameters To edit the cycle parameters:


(Full Edit Mode)
1. Press [PARAMETER].
PARAMETER SETTINGS 2. Enter your password.
The VIEW PARAMETERS screen (Figure 7–15) appears.
ACCESS REQUIRED
Figure 7–15. VIEW PARAMETERS SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
VIEW PARAMETERS (A=Adjustable)
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
A Exposure Time 00:30:00
A Dry 1=vac 2=grav 2
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
A Drying Time 00:30:00
A Exposure Temp 121.1 C

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL EDIT OK

WS-0037 733HC

3. Press [EDIT].
The EDIT PARAMETERS screen (Figure 7–16) appears.

Figure 7–16. EDIT PARAMETERS SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
VIEW PARAMETERS (A=Adjustable)
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
A Exposure Time 00:30:00
A Dry 1=vac 2=grav 2
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
A Drying Time 00:30:00
A Exposure Temp 121.1 C

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL EDIT OK

WS-0015A 733HC

4. Select the desired parameter from the list.


5. Press ENTER.
A popup screen (see Figure 7–14) for the selected
parameter appears.

61301609701 7–17
Service Menu

6. Use the arrow keys to select the desired setting.


7. Press ENTER.
8. Press [SAVE].
9. Repeat steps 4 thru 8 for other parameters.
10. Press [OK].

7–18
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

SYSTEM MENU

The SYSTEM MENU has eight choices:


• TIME SETTINGS — see page 7–20
• CALIBRATION — see page 7–21
• DOCUMENTATION — see page 7–25
• CONFIGURATION — see page 7–30
• PASSWORDS — see page 7–39
• DIP SWITCHES — see page 7–41
• SERVICE — see page 7–42
• SAVE RAM TO FLASH — see page 7–51

Figure 7–17. SYSTEM MENU

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA


DETAILS
TIME SETTINGS
PLOT GRAPH
CALIBRATION
37.3 CTEMP
CHAMBER 14.68 PSI
DOCUMENTATION
BAR GRAPH
SYSTEMCONFIGURATION
MENU

0
PASSWORDS
ABOUT
DIP SWITCHES

REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME

WS-0032A

61301609701 7–19
Service Menu

TIME SETTINGS MENU

The TIME SETTINGS menu (Figure 7–18) has two options:


• CALENDAR — see page 7–21.
• ALARM CLOCK — see page 7–22.

Figure 7–18. TIME SETTINGS MENU

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

0.00 PSI
DETAILS
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
TIME SETTINGS C
PLOT CALENDAR
CALIBRATION
ALARM CLOCKC
BAR G DOCUMENTATION
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
I
SYSTEMCONFIGURATION
0.05 PSI
ABOUTPASSWORDS

0
0.00 C
DIP SWITCHES
134.3 C

REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0062

7–20
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Setting the Clock and To set the clock and calendar:


Calendar
1. Press [SETUP].
CALENDAR 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > TIME
SETTINGS > CALENDAR.
ACCESS REQUIRED The CALENDAR SCREEN (Figure 7–18) appears.

Figure 7–19. CALENDAR SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CALENDAR
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
TIME 17:18:27 HH:MM:SS

37.3 C 14.68 PSI

DATE 06/19/2003 MM/DD/YYYY

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

ws-0021

3. Select the TIME field.


4. Press ENTER.
5. Use the arrow keys to set the correct time.
6. Press ENTER.
7. Select the DATE field.
8. Press ENTER.
9. Repeat steps 4 thru 6 for the date.
10. Press [SAVE] when finished.

To change the time and date formats, see “Selecting the Language, Date
NOTE
Format, and Units” on page 7–34.

61301609701 7–21
Service Menu

Setting the Alarm Clock The alarm clock function is used to control the Utility Control option. Alarm
clock times can be enabled on a day-to-day basis.

To set the alarm clock:

1. Press [SETUP].
CALENDAR 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > TIME
SETTINGS > ALARM CLOCK.
ACCESS REQUIRED The ALARM CLOCK screen (Figure 7–35) appears.

Figure 7–20. ALARM CLOCK SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

ALARM CLOCK
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
(HH:MM) MTWTFSS

37.3 C
Utilities Off 19:30 14.68 PSI
1111100
Utilities On 03:00 1111100

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0023

3. Refer to the following procedure:


• “Set the Utilities Control On and Off Times” on page 6–34.

7–22
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

CALIBRATION MENU

The CALIBRATION menu (Figure 7–19) has three options:


• MANUAL — see page 7–23.
• AUTOMATIC — see page 7–22.
• BRIDGE TABLES — see page 7–24.

Figure 7–21. CALIBRATION MENU

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

0.00 PSI
DETAILS
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
TIME SETTINGS C
PLOT MANUAL
CALIBRATION
AUTOMATIC C
BAR G DOCUMENTATION
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
0.05 PSI
BRIDGE TABLES
SYSTEMCONFIGURATION
0.05 PSI
ABOUTPASSWORDS

0
0.00 C
DIP SWITCHES
134.3 C

REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0062

What is the difference between automatic and manual calibration?

When automatic calibration is selected, the user enters high and low
reference values for the sensor and the software recalculates the gain and
offset value. This is the usual method of calibration.

When manual calibration is selected, the user directly enters the gain and
offset values. This method is useful when reprogramming the values after
replacing the flash EPROM.

61301609701 7–23
Service Menu

Calibrating the Temperature AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION


Sensors and Pressure
Transducer To calibrate the temperature and pressure inputs:

1. Press [SETUP].
CALIBRATION 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> AUTOMATIC.
ACCESS REQUIRED The AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (Figure 7–20) screen
appears.

Figure 7–22. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR CHAMBER PSIA
CALIBRATE

00 Chamber Temp NO 14.68 PSI


37.3 C
01 Jacket Temp NO
03 Chamber PSIA YES

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME NEXT

WS-0063A

3. Refer to the following procedures:


a. “Pressure Transducer Calibration” on page 4–9.
b. “Temperature Sensor Calibration (Using Test Plugs)”
on page 4–13.
c. “Temperature Sensor Calibration (Using Ice and Oil
Baths)” on page 4–20.

7–24
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

MANUAL CALIBRATION

To calibrate the temperature and pressure inputs:

1. Press [SETUP].
CALIBRATION 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> MANUAL.
ACCESS REQUIRED The MANUAL CALIBRATION screen (Figure 7–21)
appears.

Figure 7–23. MANUAL CALIBRATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
MANUAL CALIBRATION
CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUEPSIA

00 Chamber Temp 9.999 -894.9 87.5


37.3 C
01 Jacket Temp 9.999 -894.914.68
87.5PSI
03 Chamber PSIA 9.999 -88.13 11.85

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0066A

3. See “ENTER TRANSDUCER DATA AND


CONFIGURATION SETTINGS” on page 5–19.

61301609701 7–25
Service Menu

Entering the Bridge To enter the bridge compensation table data:


Compensation Table Data
1. Press [SETUP].
CALIBRATION 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > CALIBRATION
> BRIDGE TABLES.
ACCESS REQUIRED The BRIDGE COMPENSATION screen (Figure 7–22)
appears.

Figure 7–24. BRIDGE COMPENSATION SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

BRIDGE COMPENSATION
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
TRANSDUCER SN J123 TABLE 1
RB GAIN OFFSET

2810 37.3 C 78.40 14.684.84


PSI
2938 78.40 4.65
3079 78.60 4.50
3233
3397
79.20
79.80 0
REMAINING TIME
4.31
4.13

CANCEL HOME ID NEXT OK


TABLE
WS-0067

3. Enter the bridge compensation table from the pressure


transducer data card. See “ENTER NEW VALUES FROM
THE DATA CARD” on page 5–8.

7–26
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

DOCUMENTATION MENU

The DOCUMENTATION menu (Figure 7–23) has three options:


• PRINT CYCLE SETUP — see page 7-26
• PRINTER — see page 7-27
• PRINTER LOG VALUES — see page 7-28

Figure 7–25. DOCUMENTATION MENU

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

0.00 PSI
DETAILS
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
CALENDAR C
PRINT CYCLE SETUP
PLOT CALIBRATION
PRINTER C
BAR G DOCUMENTATION
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
PRINTER 0.05 PSI
LOG VALUES
SYSTEMCONFIGURATION
0.05 PSI
ABOUTPASSWORDS
DIP SWITCHES
0
0.00 C
134.3 C

REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0069

61301609701 7–27
Service Menu

Printing a Program Listing To obtain a list of cycles phases:

1. Press [SETUP].
DOCUMENTATION 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password >
DOCUMENTATION > PRINT CYCLE SETUP.
ACCESS REQUIRED The PRINTOUT CYCLE screen (Figure 7–24) appears.

Figure 7–26. PRINTOUT CYCLE SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

PRINTOUT CYCLE
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
P08 grv GRAVITY1
P09 grv GRAVITY1
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
P10 grv GRAVITY1
P11 grv GRAVITY1
P12
P13
P14
grv GRAVITY1
liq LIQUIDS1
liq LIQUIDS1
0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME PRINT PRINT OK


ALL
WS-0070

3. Select the desired cycle.


4. Press [PRINT] to print the program.
5. Repeat steps 3 thru 5 for other cycles.
6. Press [OK].

7–28
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Setting Up the Printer Log The printer records data at two rates: a normal rate (fast log interval) during
Interval the exposure phase and a slower rate (slow log interval) during the other
cycle phases.

To set up the printer log interval:

1. Press [SETUP].
DOCUMENTATION 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password >
DOCUMENTATION > PRINTER.
ACCESS REQUIRED The PRINTER screen (Figure 7–25) appears.

Figure 7–27. PRINTER SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

PRINTER
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
MODE 1
SLOW LOG INTERVAL 01:00
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
FAST LOG INTERVAL 00:30

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0029

NOTE Do NOT change the MODE value.

3. Select the SLOW LOG INTERVAL field.


4. Press ENTER.
5. Use the arrows to enter the desired value.
6. Press [SAVE].
7. Select the FAST LOG INTERVAL field.
8. Repeat steps 4 thru 6.
9. Press [OK].

61301609701 7–29
Service Menu

SettingUp the Printer Log The printout can be set up to display up to four values. The values are
Values Definition identified by name and value type/item (e.g., AI01 CHAMBER TEMP is
analog input (AI) number 1, chamber temperature).

To set up the printer log values definitions:

DOCUMENTATION 1. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password >


DOCUMENTATION > PRINTER LOG VALUES.
ACCESS REQUIRED The CONFIGURE PRINTER LOG VALUES screen (Figure
7–26) appears.

Figure 7–28. CONFIGURE PRINTER LOG VALUES SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CONFIGURE PRINTER LOG VALUES


CHAMBER
DEFINITION TEMP
LIST: 1 CHAMBER PSIA

1 Chamber Temp
2 37.3
Jacket C
Temp 14.68 PSI
4 Chamber PSIA

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME NEXT DELETE OK


LIST
WS-0028

2. Select the printer column (e.g., 1, 2, 3,4) to be assigned.


3. Press ENTER.
The log value type list (Figure 7–27) appears.

7–30
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

4. Select the value type (e.g., AI ANALOG INPUT).

Figure 7–29. LOG VALUE TYPE SELECTION

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CONFIGURE PRINTER LOG VALUES


CHAMBER
DEFINITION TEMP
LIST: 1 CHAMBER PSIA

AI ANALOG INPUT
AO 37.3 C OUTPUT
ANALOG 14.68 PSI
TP TP CONVERTER
FC FUNCTION CALCULATION
CP COMPARATOR
0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL

WS-0027

5. Press ENTER.
The log value item list (Figure 7–28) appears.
6. Select the input source from the list (e.g., Chamber RTD).

Figure 7–30. LOG VALUE ITEM SELECTION

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CONFIGURE PRINTER LOG VALUES


CHAMBER
DEFINITION TEMP
LIST: 1 CHAMBER PSIA

AI00 Chamber Temperature


37.3 C 14.68 PSI
AI01 Jacket Temperature
AI03 Chamber PSIA

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL

WS-0026 833HCMC

7. Press [SAVE].
The CONFIGURE PRINTER LOG VALUES screen (Figure
7–26) appears again.
8. Repeat steps 2 thru 8 for other column(s).
9. Press [OK] when finished.

61301609701 7–31
Service Menu

CONFIGURATION MENU

The CONFIGURATION menu (Figure 7–29) has five options:


• EDIT CYCLES — see page 7–31
• NAME — see page 7–32
• LANGUAGE DATE UNITS — see page 7–34
• PANEL SETUP — see page 7–36

Figure 7–31. CONFIGURATION MENU

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PRESSURE


DETAI TIME SETTINGS
EDIT CYCLES
PLOT CALIBRATION
MACHINE NAME
BAR G37.3 C
DOCUMENTATION 14.68 PSIA
LANGUAGE DATE UNITS
CONFIGURATION
SYSTE MENUPANEL SETUP
PASSWORDS

0
ABOU EXTENDED PARAMETERS
DIPSWITCHES

REMAINING TIME

WS-0031 633HC

7–32
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Changing the Cycle Name To change the cycle number (P number) and name:
and Number
1. Press [SETUP].
CONFIGURATION 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password >
CONFIGURATION > EDIT CYCLES.
ACCESS REQUIRED The EDIT CYCLES screen (Figure 7–31) appears.

Figure 7–32. EDIT CYCLES SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

EDIT CYCLES
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
1 vac PREVAC1
2 vac37.3
PREVAC1
C 14.68 PSI
3 vac PREVAC1
4 vac PREVAC2
5
6
7
vac PREVAC2
vac PREVAC3 0
vac B-D TEST REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

ws-0148

3. Select the cycle number to be changed.


4. Press ENTER.
5. Use the arrows to enter the desired value. Press [SAVE].

NOTE If two or more numbers are equal when SAVE is pressed, TWO OR MORE
SEQ. NUMBERS EQUAL will be displayed. Before pressing OK, be sure to
change one of the duplicate numbers.

6. Select the cycle name to be changed.


7. Press ENTER.
The ENTER NAME screen appears.

61301609701 7–33
Service Menu

8. Enter the new name.

Cycle names can be up to eight characters long. The three letter prefix (e.g.,
NOTE
grv) indicates the cycle type and cannot be changed.

Prefix Cycle Name

grv GRAVITY 1

9. Use the arrows and [ENTER] button to enter the cycle


name.
10. Press [SAVE].
11. Repeat steps 3 thru 11 for other cycles.
12. Press [OK] when finished.

Assigning the Sterilizer To assign the sterilizer name:


Name
1. Press [SETUP].
CONFIGURATION 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password >
CONFIGURATION > NAME.
ACCESS REQUIRED The MACHINE NAME screen (Figure 7–31) appears.

Figure 7–33. MACHINE NAME SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

MACHINE NAME
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
NAME STERILIZER No. 1
37.3 C 14.68 PSI

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0030

7–34
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

3. Select the NAME field.


The MACHINE NAME ENTRY screen (Figure 7–32)
appears.

Figure 7–34. MACHINE NAME ENTRY SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
MACHINE NAME ENTRY
NAME: STERILIZER No. 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
U V W X Y Z Å Ä Ö Ü
! " # % & ( ) \ , ;
. : + SPACE - / =

CANCEL CAPS DELETE OK


LOCK
WS-0020

4. Use the arrows and ENTER button to enter the sterilizer


name (see “Entering a Password (or Alphanumeric Value)”
on page 7–5).
5. Press [SAVE].
6. Press [OK].

61301609701 7–35
Service Menu

Selecting the Language, Date To select the language, date format, and pressure and
Format, and Units temperature units:

1. Press [SETUP].
CONFIGURATION 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password >
CONFIGURATION > LANGUAGE DATE UNITS.
ACCESS REQUIRED The LANGUAGE DATE UNITS screen (Figure 7–33)
appears.

Figure 7–35. LANGUAGE DATE UNITS SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

LANGUAGE DATE UNITS


CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
DATE FORMAT
37.3 C MM/DD/YYYY14.68 PSI
PRESSURE UNIT PSI
TEMP UNIT C

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0019

LANGUAGE

NOTE Unless special software is installed, ENGLISH is the only available


language.

DATE FORMAT
3. Select the DATE FORMAT field.
4. Press ENTER.
5. Use the UP or DOWN arrow to select from the available
date formats: MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY or
YYYY/MM/DD.
6. Press [SAVE].

7–36
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

PRESSURE UNIT
7. Select the PRESSURE UNITS field.
8. Press ENTER.
9. Use the UP or DOWN arrow to select PSI, KPA, or BARS.
10. Press [SAVE].

TEMPERATURE UNIT
11. Select the TEMP UNITS field.
12. Press ENTER.
13. Use the UP or DOWN arrow to select F or C.
14. Press [SAVE].
15. Press [OK].

61301609701 7–37
Service Menu

Setting Up the Display Panel Display panel setup options include:


• default process screen (Details, Plot Graph or Bar Graph)
• parameter edit level (Quick or Full)
• screensaver delay
• save confirmation.

To set up the display panel:

1. Press [SETUP].
CONFIGURATION 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password >
CONFIGURATION > PANEL SETUP.
ACCESS REQUIRED The PANEL SETUP screen (Figure 7–34) appears.

Figure 7–36. PANEL SETUP SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

PANEL SETUP
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
DEFAULT MENU: DETAILS
PARAMETER
37.3EDIT:
C QUICK 14.68 PSI
SCREEN SAVER: 99 (MIN)
CONFIRM SAVE/CANCEL: YES

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0025

DEFAULT PROCESS SCREEN


3. Select the DEFAULT MENU field.
4. Press ENTER.
5. Use the UP or DOWN arrow to select DETAILS, PLOT
GRAPH, or BAR GRAPH.
6. Press [SAVE].

7–38
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

PARAMETER EDIT (Quick or Full)


7. Select the PARAMETER EDIT field.
8. Press ENTER.
9. Use the UP or DOWN arrow to select QUICK or FULL edit.
10. Press [SAVE].

SCREEN SAVER
11. Select the SCREEN SAVER field.
12. Press ENTER.
13. Use the arrows to select the screen saver delay value (in
minutes).
14. Press [SAVE].

CONFIRM SAVE/CANCEL
15. Select the CONFIRM SAVE/CANCEL field.
16. Press ENTER.
17. Use the UP or DOWN arrow to select YES or NO.
18. Press [SAVE].
19. Press [OK] when finished.

61301609701 7–39
Service Menu

PASSWORDS MENU

Configuring Password Access The PASSWORDS menu is used to assign passwords and enable levels of
for Individual Users access. See Table 1–7 on page 1–29 for a list of access areas and
privileges.

To assign and configure passwords for individual users:

1. Press [SETUP].
PASSWORD SETUP 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > PASSWORDS.
The PASSWORDS (Figure 7–36) screen appears.
ACCESS REQUIRED
Figure 7–37. PASSWORDS SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

PASSWORDS ACCESS AREAS


CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
NAME PASSWORD ABCDEFGHIJKL
USER NAME 12345 YYNNNNYNNYNN
37.3 C 14.68 PSI

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME PRINT ACCESS ADD/


AREA DELETE
WS-0052

3. Select the user name from the list. To add a new user, see
“ADD USER” on page 7–40.
4. Select the PASSWORD field for the desired user.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Assign the password (see “Entering a Password (or
Alphanumeric Value)” on page 7–5).
7. Press [OK].

NOTE Press ACCESS AREAS to view the access area letter assignments.

7–40
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

8. Select the desired access area options one at a time.


a. Select the first ACCESS AREA field that you want to
enable or disable.
b. Press ENTER.
c. Use the UP or DOWN arrow to enable or disable
access to that area.
d. Press [SAVE].
e. Repeat steps a. thru d. for other access areas.
9. Press [HOME] when finished (or [CANCEL] to return to the
SYSTEM MENU).

ADD USER
1. Press [ADD/DELETE].
2. Press [ADD USER]
3. Assign the user name (see “Entering a Password (or
Alphanumeric Value)” on page 7–5).
4. Select the PASSWORD field.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Assign the password (see “Entering a Password (or
Alphanumeric Value)” on page 7–5).
7. Select the ACCESS AREA field.
8. Select the desired access area options one at a time. (See
step 8 of previous procedure).
9. Press [HOME] when finished (or [CANCEL] to return to the
SYSTEM MENU).

DELETE USER
1. Press [ADD/DELETE].
2. Press [DELETE USER]
3. Select the user name from the list.
4. Press ENTER.
5. Press [SAVE]
6. Press [HOME] when finished (or [CANCEL] to return to the
SYSTEM MENU).

61301609701 7–41
Service Menu

DIPSWITCHES MENU

To configuration the sterilizer:

1. Press [SETUP].
DIP SWITCHES 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > DIP
SWITCHES.
ACCESS REQUIRED The DIP SWITCHES screen (Figure 7–37) appears.

Figure 7–38. DIP SWITCHES SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
DIPSWITCHES
CHAMBER TEMP
DESCRIPTION STATUS CHAMBER PSIA

DS01 SD=0 DD=1 1


DS04 37.3 500=1
400=0 C 0 14.68 PSI
DS08 Utility S.D. 0
DS11 Parameter Check 0
DS12
DS13
DS14
Jacket Bypass
T-Doc
Water-Saver
0 0
REMAINING
0

0 TIME

CANCEL HOME PRINT OK

WS-0071A

3. Refer to the following procedures:


a. “Set Up the Door Configuration and Sterilizer Model”
on page 4–25.
b. “Enable the Sterilizer Options” on page 4–26.

7–42
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

SERVICE MENU

The SERVICE menu (Figure 7–38) has three options:


• ERROR LOG — see page 7–43
• DIAGNOSTIC — see page 7–44
• PACS ADDRESSES (engineering use only)

Figure 7–39. SERVICE MENU

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

0.00 PSI
CHAMBER TEMP
DETAILS CHAMBER PSIA
CONFIGURATION
ERROR LOG C
PLOT DOCUMENTATYION
DIAGNOSTIC C
BAR G PASSWORDS
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
0.05 PSI
PACS ADDRESSES
SYSTEMDIP
M SWITCHES
0.05 PSI
SERVICE
ABOUTENU
0.00 C
SAVE RAM TO FLASH
0
134.3 C

REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME

WS-0072

61301609701 7–43
Service Menu

Viewing the Error Log To view the error log:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
ERROR LOG.
ACCESS REQUIRED The ERROR LOG screen (Figure 7–39) appears.

Figure 7–40. ERROR LOG SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

ERROR LOG
CHAMBER TEMP
DESCRIPTION CHAMBER PSIA
DATE TIME CYCLE NO.

WATER IN DRAIN 03/16/03 22:10 43


37.3 C
WATER IN DRAIN 03/16/03 14.68 PSI
21:56 43
WATER IN DRAIN 03/16/03 21:48 43

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME MORE PRINT OK


INFO
WS-0073

3. Refer to “View the Error Log” on page 3–3.

7–44
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Viewing the Analog and The DIAGNOSTICS menu (Figure 7–40) has eight options:
Digital Inputs • ANALOG INPUT — see page 7–45
• ANALOG OUTPUT (not used)
• DIGITAL INPUT — see page 7–46
• DIGITAL OUTPUT — see page 7–47
• SYSTEM FLAG — see page 7–49
• USER FLAG — see page 7–48
• PRINTER — see page 7–48
• LED/BUZZER — see page 7–50

Figure 7–41. DIAGNOSTICS MENU

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

0.00 PSI
CHAMBER TEMP
DETAILS CHAMBER PSIA
CONFIGURATION C INPUTOG
ERROR LANALOG
PLOT SYSTEM SETUPION ANALOG INPUT
DIAGNOSTICA C
37.3 C
BAR G PASSWORDS ANALOG 14.68 PSI
0.05 PSI OUTPUT
PACS ADDRESSES
SYSTEMDIP SWITCHES DIGITAL
0.05 PSIINPUT
ABOUTSERVICE

SYSTEM
134.3 0
0.00 C OUTPUT
DIGITAL
SAVE RAM TO FLASH
C FLAG

REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME

WS-0075

NOTE This sterilizer does not use analog outputs (all control valves are on/off
rather than the proportional [throttling] type).

61301609701 7–45
Service Menu

ANALOG INPUTS

To view the analog inputs:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC > ANALOG INPUT.
ACCESS REQUIRED The TEST ANALOG IN screen (Figure 7–41) appears.

Figure 7–42. TEST ANALOG IN SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
TEST ANALOG IN
INPUT CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER
ACT. VAL PSIA

AI00 Chamber Temp 88.0 C


37.3 C 14.68 PSI
AI01 Jacket Temp 87.5 C
AI03 Chamber PSIA 11.85 PSI

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0076A

3. Refer to “ANALOG INPUTS” on page 3–5.

7–46
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

DIGITAL INPUTS

To view the digital inputs:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC > DIGITAL INPUT.
ACCESS REQUIRED The TEST DIGITAL IN screen (Figure 7–42) appears.

Figure 7–43. TEST DIGITAL IN SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

TEST DIGITAL IN
INPUT
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
MODE

DI00 CE Open 0
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
DI01 CE Not Closed 0
DI02 CE (RE) Sealed 0
DI04
DI05
DI08
RE Open
RE Not Closed
H20 Not In Drain
0
REMAINING TIME
0
0
0

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0077A

3. Refer to “DIGITAL INPUTS” on page 3–6.

61301609701 7–47
Service Menu

Operating the Digital To operate the digital outputs:


Ouptuts
1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC > DIGITAL OUTPUT.
ACCESS REQUIRED The TEST DIGITAL OUT screen (Figure 7–43) appears.

Figure 7–44. TEST DIGITAL OUT SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

TEST DIGITAL OUT


CHAMBER TEMP
OUTPUT MODE CHAMBER
SET PSIA
ACT. VAL

00 Steam to Chamber AUT 0 0


37.3 C 14.68 PSI
01 Chamber Drain AUT 0 0
02 Chamber Air-In AUT 0 0

0
03 Secondary Drain AUT 0 0
04 Secondary Buzzer AUT 0 0
05 Water to Ejector AUT 0 0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL AUTO/ 1/0 PULSE ACTI-


MAN VATE
WS-0078

3. Refer to “Operating the Digital Outputs Manually” on


page 3–7.

NOTE
If any outputs are left in the manual mode, a MANUAL MODE message is
displayed. All outputs must be in AUTO mode before a cycle can be run.

7–48
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Viewing the User and System USER FLAGS


Flags
The user flags indicate the status of the Boolean language portion of the
control software.

To view the user flags:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC > USER FLAG.
ACCESS REQUIRED The TEST USER FLAG screen (Figure 7–44) appears.

Figure 7–45. TEST USER FLAG SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
TEST USER FLAG
FLAG CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
MODE

UF000 Process Failure 1


37.3 C 14.68 PSI
UF001 Start OK 0
UF002 Door Unseal OK 0
UF004 In Progress 0
UF005
UF006
UF007
Cycle Good
Always True Flag
0 1
Uni RE-EnabledREMAINING TIME0
0

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0079

3. Refer to “USER FLAGS” on page 3–11 and Appendix,


“System and User Flags”.

61301609701 7–49
Service Menu

SYSTEM FLAGS

The system flags indicate the status of the C language portion of the control
software.

To view the system flags:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC > SYSTEM FLAG.
ACCESS REQUIRED The TEST SYSTEM FLAG screen (Figure 7–45) appears.

Figure 7–46. TEST SYSTEM FLAG SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15
TEST SYSTEM FLAG
FLAG CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
MODE

SF000 INT I2C ERROR 1


37.3 C 0 14.68 PSI
SF001 PANEL 1 ERROR
SF002 PANEL 2 ERROR 0
SF003 RS232 COM ERROR 0
SF004
SF005
SF006
RS485 COM ERROR
ANYBUS COM ERROR 0 0
REMAINING TIME0
PRINT COM ERROR
0

CANCEL HOME OK

WS-0080

3. Refer to “SYSTEM FLAGS” on page 3–10 and Appendix,


“System and User Flags”.

7–50
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Testing the Printer and LEDs PRINTER

To test the printer:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC > PRINTER.
ACCESS REQUIRED The printer outputs a test string.

LEDs

To test the LEDs:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SERVICE >
DIAGNOSTIC > LED/BUZZER.
ACCESS REQUIRED All control panel LEDs light and the alarm sounds for five
seconds.

61301609701 7–51
Service Menu

SAVE RAM TO FLASH

Whenever the customer requests changes to the cycles, such as renaming


and resequencing the cycles, it is good practice to save these changes to
the EPROM.

To save the RAM to the EPROM:

1. Press [SETUP].
SERVICE 2. Select SYSTEM MENU > enter password > SAVE RAM TO
FLASH.
ACCESS REQUIRED Figure 7–47. SAVE RAM TO FLASH SCREEN

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

SAVE RAM TO FLASH


CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA

37.3 C 14.68 PSI

0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME NO YES

WS-0081

3. Press [YES].
4. Press ENTER.

7–52
Figure 7–48. MENU TREE (sheet 1 of 4)

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA

Main Screen 37.3 C 14.68 PSI

0
REMAINING TIME

SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL


CYCLE METER
WS-0014

Quick Edit Full Edit

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00
P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00
01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15
01 STANDBY 00:24:15
VIEW PARAMETERS (A=Adjustable)
SELECT CYCLE EDIT PARAMETERS
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
DETAILS A ExposureTEMP
CHAMBER Time 00:30:00 CHAMBER PSIA A Exposure Time 00:30:00
P08 grv GRAVITY1 A Dry 1=vac 2=grav 2
PLOT GRAPH A Dry 1=vac 2=grav 2
37.3 CTEMP
CHAMBER 14.68 PSI P09 grv37.3
GRAVITY1
C A Drying 37.3 C 14.68 PSI
BAR GRAPH 14.68 PSI 37.3 Time
C 00:30:00 14.68 PSI A Drying Time 00:30:00
P10 grv GRAVITY1
SYSTEM MENU A Exposure Temp 121.1 C
P11 grv GRAVITY2 A Exposure Temp 121.1 C
ABOUT
0
REMAINING TIME
P12
P13
P14
grv GRAVITY2
grv GRAVITY2
lkt
0
LEAKTESTREMAINING TIME
0
REMAINING TIME
0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL CANCEL EDIT OK


CANCEL OK CANCEL MORE OK
PARAMS
WS-0039 WS-0037 733HC
WS-0016 833HC WS-0033 733HC

Select Cycle Screen Quick Edit Screen View Parameters Screen

Setup Menu
00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY 1 01:36:36 P10 grv GRAVITY 1 01:36:36 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00
02 CYCL COMPLETE 00:04:34 02 CYCL COMPLETE 00:03:42 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15
ChamberTemp 81.6 C
Chamber Temp 61.2 C ABOUT
Chamber PSIA 14.45 PSI CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
Chamb Press/PSIG 0.00 PSI DETAILS
TIME SETTINGS Getinge PACS 3000
Jacket Temp 122.3 C PLOT GRAPH
CALIBRATION PANEL Version: 3.05
37.3 C 14.68 PSI 37.3 CTEMP
CHAMBER 14.68 PSI 37.3 C 14.68 PSI
Atmosphere PSIA 14.37 PSI DOCUMENTATION
BAR GRAPH PACS Version: 3.08
SYSTEMCONFIGURATION
MENU
Chamber PSIA 14.35 PSI PROM Update: 2/19/2004

0 0 0
PASSWORDS
Exp. Temp Max 121.7 C ABOUT SDN: 6130160xxxx
DIP SWITCHES
Exp. Temp Min 121.4 C Model No.: 3.00 400-500 HCMC
Time REMAINING TIME REMAINING TIME REMAINING TIME
01:40

SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL SETUP PARA- UNSEAL SETUP SELECT PARA- UNSEAL CANCEL HOME BRIGHT BRIGHT OK
CANCEL HOME
CYCLE METER METER CYCLE METER DEC INC
WS-0012 WS-0013 800
WS-0014 WS-0035 400-500 HCMC
WS-0032A

Details Screen Plot Graph Screen Bar Graph Screen About Screen

System Menu

See Sheet 2 WS-0198A 400-500 HCMC

61301609701 7–53
Figure 7–49. MENU TREE (sheet 2 of 4)

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA


DETAILS
TIME SETTINGS
PLOT GRAPH
CALIBRATION
37.3 CTEMP
CHAMBER 14.68 PSI
DOCUMENTATION
BAR GRAPH
SYSTEMCONFIGURATION
MENU

0
PASSWORDS
ABOUT
DIP SWITCHES

REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME

WS-0032A

System Menu
00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00
01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15

PASSWORDS ACCESS AREAS DIPSWITCHES SAVE RAM TO FLASH


CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP
DESCRIPTION STATUS CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
NAME PASSWORD ABCDEFGHIJKL
DS01 SD=0 DD=1 1
USER NAME 12345 YYNNNNYNNYNN
37.3 C 14.68 PSI 37.3 500=1
C 0 14.68 PSI 37.3 C 14.68 PSI
DS04 400=0
DS08 Utility S.D. 0
DS11 Parameter Check 0

0
REMAINING TIME
DS13 T-Doc
0 0

REMAINING TIME
0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME PRINT ACCESS ADD/ CANCEL HOME PRINT OK CANCEL HOME NO YES
AREA DELETE
WS-0052 WS-0071 400-500 HCMC WS-0081

Passwords Screen DIP Switches Screen Save RAM to Flash Screen


00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00
01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15
0.00 PSI AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION 0.00 PSI
DETAILS
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA DETAILS
CHAMBER TEMP 0.00 PSI
TIME SETTINGS SENSOR CALIBRATE CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP
DETAILS CHAMBER PSIA
MANUAL C CALENDAR C DETAILS
PLOT PRINT CYCLE SETUP TIME SETTINGS CONFIGURATION
CALIBRATION PLOT CALIBRATION EDIT CYCLES ERROR LOG C
AUTOMATIC C PRINTER C PLOT GRAPH
CALIBRATION PLOT DOCUMENTATYION
BAR G DOCUMENTATION
37.3 C 14.68 PSI 00 Chamber Temp NO 14.68 PSI MACHINE NAME DIAGNOSTIC C
0.05 PSI 37.3 C BAR G DOCUMENTATION
37.3 C 14.68 PSI 37.3 C 14.68 PSI
BRIDGE TABLES PRINTER 0.05 PSI
LOG VALUES DOCUMENTATION BAR G PASSWORDS
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
SYSTEMCONFIGURATION 01 Jacket Temp NO BAR GRAPH LANGUAGE DATE UNITS 0.05 PSI
PACS ADDRESSES
0.05 PSI SYSTEMCONFIGURATION DIP
03 Chamber PSIA YES 0.05 PSI CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM MENUPANEL SETUP SYSTEM M SWITCHES
ABOUTPASSWORDS 0.05 PSI
ABOUTPASSWORDS

0 0
0.00 C PASSWORDS SERVICE

0 0
0.00 C ABOUTENU

0
DIP SWITCHES DIP SWITCHES ABOU 0.00 C
134.3 C DIPSWITCHES SAVE RAM TO FLASH
134.3 C 134.3 C
REMAINING TIME REMAINING TIME REMAINING TIME REMAINING TIME REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL HOME CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL MORE CANCEL HOME
WS-0062 WS-0063 833HCMC
WS-0069 WS-0031
WS-0072

Time Settings Menu Calibration Menu Documentation Menu Configuration Menu Service Menu
See Sheet 3 See Sheet 4
WS-0198B 400-500 HCMC

7–54
Figure 7–49. MENU TREE (sheet 3 of 4)

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 Exposure Time Exposure Temp
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00
Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00
01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15
01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION 0.00 PSI
0.00 PSI CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA DETAILS
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
DETAILS
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA SENSOR CALIBRATE CALENDAR C CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
TIME SETTINGS C PRINT CYCLE SETUP
PLOT CALIBRATION DETAILS
TIME SETTINGS
PLOT MANUAL EDIT CYCLES
CALIBRATION PRINTER C
AUTOMATIC C 00 Chamber Temp BAR G DOCUMENTATION PLOT GRAPH
CALIBRATION
37.3 C NO 14.68 PSI 37.3 C 14.68 PSI MACHINE NAME
BAR G DOCUMENTATION
37.3 C 14.68 PSI PRINTER 0.05 PSI
LOG VALUES 37.3 C 14.68 PSI
0.05 PSI
BRIDGE TABLES 01 Jacket Temp NO DOCUMENTATION
BAR GRAPH
SYSTEMCONFIGURATION LANGUAGE DATE UNITS
SYSTEMCONFIGURATION 0.05 PSI CONFIGURATION
0.05 PSI 03 Chamber PSIA YES SYSTEM MENUPANEL SETUP
ABOUTPASSWORDS
ABOUTPASSWORDS
DIP SWITCHES
0.00 C
134.3 C
0 0
REMAINING TIME
DIP SWITCHES
0.00 C
134.3 C 0
REMAINING TIME
ABOU
PASSWORDS
DIPSWITCHES
0
REMAINING TIME REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME CANCEL HOME OK


CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL MORE

WS-0063 833HCMC WS-0069


WS-0031
WS-0062

Time Settings Menu Documentation Menu

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00
01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15

PRINTOUT CYCLE PRINTER CONFIGURE PRINTER LOG VALUES


CALENDAR ALARM CLOCK
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER
DEFINITION TEMP
LIST: 1 CHAMBER PSIA

TIME 17:18:27 HH:MM:SS (HH:MM) MTWTFSS P08 grv GRAVITY1 MODE 1


1 Chamber Temp
P09 grv GRAVITY1
37.3 C
SLOW LOG INTERVAL 01:00 37.3 C
37.3 C 14.68 PSI 37.3 C
Utilities Off 19:30 14.68 PSI
1111100 14.68 PSI 37.3 C 14.68 PSI 2 Jacket Temp 14.68 PSI
P10 grv GRAVITY1 FAST LOG INTERVAL 00:30
Utilities On 03:00 1111100 4 Chamber PSIA
DATE 06/19/2003 MM/DD/YYYY P11 grv GRAVITY1

0
REMAINING TIME
0
REMAINING TIME
P12
P13
P14
grv GRAVITY1
liq LIQUIDS1
liq LIQUIDS1
0
REMAINING TIME
0
REMAINING TIME
0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL HOME PRINT PRINT OK CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL HOME NEXT DELETE OK
OK
ALL LIST
WS-0023 WS-0070 WS-0029 WS-0028
ws-0021

Calendar Screen Alarm Clock Screen Printout Cycle Screen Printer Screen Configure Printer Log Values Screen

Calibration Menu Configuration Menu

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00
01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00
01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION MANUAL CALIBRATION BRIDGE COMPENSATION
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
CALIBRATE CHAMBER TEMP
SENSOR GAIN CHAMBER
OFFSET VALUEPSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA EDIT CYCLES LANGUAGE DATE UNITS PANEL SETUP
SENSOR TRANSDUCER SN J123 TABLE 1 MACHINE NAME CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
RB GAIN OFFSET
00 Chamber Temp 9.999 -894.9 87.5 1 vac PREVAC1 NAME STERILIZER No. 1 LANGUAGE ENGLISH DEFAULT MENU: DETAILS
00 Chamber Temp NO 14.68 PSI
37.3 C 37.3 C 37.3 C
01 Jacket Temp 9.999 -894.914.68
87.5PSI 2810 78.40 14.684.84
PSI
2 vac37.3
PREVAC1
C DATE FORMAT
37.3 C MM/DD/YYYY14.68 PSI PARAMETER
37.3EDIT:
C QUICK 14.68 PSI
01 Jacket Temp NO 14.68 PSI 37.3 C 14.68 PSI
2938 78.40 4.65 SCREEN SAVER: 99
03 Chamber PSIA 9.999 -88.13 11.85 3 vac PREVAC1 PRESSURE UNIT PSI (MIN)
03 Chamber PSIA YES 3079 78.60 4.50 CONFIRM SAVE/CANCEL: YES
4 TEMP UNIT C

0 0 0
vac PREVAC1

0 0 0
3233 79.20 4.31

REMAINING TIME REMAINING TIME


3397 79.80
REMAINING TIME
4.13
5
6
7
vac PREVAC1
vac PREVAC1
vac B-D TEST REMAINING TIME
0
REMAINING TIME REMAINING TIME REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL HOME ID NEXT OK


TABLE CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL HOME OK
WS-0063 833HCMC WS-0066 833HCMC WS-0067

WS-0019 WS-0025
WS-0148 800HC WS-0030

Automatic Calibration Screen Manual Calibration Screen Bridge Compensation Screen Edit Cycles Screen Machine Name Screen Language Date Units Screen Panel Setup Screen
WS-0199 833HCMC

61301609701 7–55
D32 DI 00 1 JI CE Open
D33 DI 01 2 JI CE Not Closed
D34 DI 02 3 JI CE (RE) Sealed
D35 DI 03 4 JI
D36 DI 04 5 JI RE Open
D31 DI 05 6 JI RE Not Closed
D37 DI 06 7 JI
D38
DI 07 8 JI
2A2U

DI 08 9 JI H20 Not in Drain


CM1 Board

D56
D57 DI 09 10 JI Controls ON
D58 DI 10 11 JI Adequate Air Press.
D59 DI 11 12 JI

7–56
D60 DI 12 13 JI
D55 DI 13 14 JI
D61
DI 14 15 JI
Input LEDs

D62
DI 15 16 JI

D39 DO 00 1 JO Stm to Chamber


D40 DO 01 2 JO Chamber Drain
D41 DO 02 3 JO Chamber Air-In
D42 DO 03 4 JO Secondary Drain (Liq)
D43 DO 04 5 JO Secondary Buzzer
D44 DO 05 6 JO Water to Ejector
D45 DO 06 7 JO Boiler ON
D46 DO 07 8 JO Steam to Jacket

D4 DO 08 9 JO CE, Open
D5 DO 09 10 JO CE, Close
D6 DO 10 11 JO CE (RE) Dr Seal
D7 DO 11 12 JO CE (RE) Unseal
D8 DO 12 13 JO RE, Open
D9 DO 13 14 JO RE, Close
Output LEDs

D18 DO 14 15 JO Water Saver ON


D11 DO 15 16 JO
WS-0114 A
Figure 7–50. MENU TREE (sheet 4 of 4)

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15

0.00 PSI
CHAMBER TEMP
DETAILS CHAMBER PSIA
CONFIGURATION
ERROR LOG C
PLOT DOCUMENTATYION
DIAGNOSTIC C
BAR G PASSWORDS
37.3 C 14.68 PSI
0.05 PSI
PACS ADDRESSES
SYSTEMDIP
M SWITCHES
0.05 PSI
SERVICE
ABOUTENU
0.00 C
SAVE RAM TO FLASH
134.3 C 0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME

WS-0072

Service Menu

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00


Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00


01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15
ERROR LOG
0.00 PSI
CHAMBER TEMP
DESCRIPTION CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER TEMP
DETAILS CHAMBER PSIA
DATE TIME CYCLE NO.
CONFIGURATION C INPUTOG
ERROR LANALOG
WATER IN DRAIN 03/16/03 22:10 43 PLOT SYSTEM SETUPION ANALOG INPUT
DIAGNOSTICA C
37.3 C
WATER IN DRAIN 03/16/03 14.68 PSI
21:56 43 37.3 C
BAR G PASSWORDS 14.68 PSI
ANALOG
0.05 PSI OUTPUT
PACS ADDRESSES
WATER IN DRAIN 03/16/03 21:48 43 SYSTEMDIP SWITCHES DIGITAL
0.05 PSIINPUT
SERVICE

0
ABOUT

REMAINING TIME
DIGITAL
0.00
SAVE RAM TO FLASH
SYSTEM
134.3 0
C OUTPUT
C FLAG

REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME MORE PRINT OK CANCEL HOME


INFO
WS-0073
WS-0075

Error Log Screen

Diagnostic Menu

00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00 00:30:00 121.1 C 00:30:00
Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time
Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time Exposure Time Exposure Temp Drying Time

P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00 P10 grv GRAVITY1 00:00:00
01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15 01 STANDBY 00:24:15
TEST ANALOG IN TEST DIGITAL IN TEST DIGITAL OUT TEST USER FLAG PRINTOUT CYCLE TEST PRINTER TEST LEDs AND BUZZER
INPUT CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER
ACT. VAL PSIA INPUT
CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
MODE CHAMBER TEMP
OUTPUT MODE CHAMBER
SET PSIA
ACT. VAL FLAG CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA
MODE CHAMBER TEMP CHAMBER PSIA CHAMBER
STRING TO BE TEMP
PRINTED CHAMBER PSIA 5 SECCHAMBER
LED ANDTEMP
BUZZER TEST CHAMBER PSIA
P08 grv GRAVITY1 <ASCII TABLE>
UF000 Process Failure 1
AI00 Chamber Temp 88.0 C DI00 CE Open 0 00 Steam to Chamber AUT 0 0 grv GRAVITY1
37.3 C 14.68 PSI 37.3 C 14.68 PSI 37.3 C 14.68 PSI 37.3 C 14.68 PSI P09 37.3 C 14.68 PSI 37.3 C
UF001 Start OK 0 14.68 PSI 37.3 C 14.68 PSI
AI01 Jacket Temp 87.5 C DI01 CE Closed 0 01 Chamber Drain AUT 0 0 grv GRAVITY1
P10
UF002 Door Unseal OK 0
AI03 Chamber PSIA 11.85 PSI DI02 CE (RE) Sealed 0 02 Chamber Air-In AUT 0 0 grv GRAVITY1
P11
UF004 In Progress 0

0
REMAINING TIME
DI04
DI05
DI09
RE Open
RE Closed
Controls ON
0
REMAINING TIME
0
0
0
03
05
07
Drain Cooling Water
Water to Ejector
Steam to Jacket
0
AUT
AUT
AUT
REMAINING TIME
0
0
0
0
0
0
UF005
UF006
UF007
Cycle Good
Always True Flag
0 1
Uni RE-EnabledREMAINING TIME0
0
P12
P13
P14
grv GRAVITY1
liq LIQUIDS1
liq LIQUIDS1
0
REMAINING TIME
0
REMAINING TIME
0
REMAINING TIME

CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL AUTO/ 1/0 PULSE ACTI- CANCEL HOME OK CANCEL HOME PRINT PRINT OK CANCEL HOME OK
TEST CANCEL HOME TEST OK
MAN VATE ALL
WS-0076 833 HCMC WS-0078 833HCMC WS-0079
WS-0077 833HCMC WS-0202
WS-0070 WS-0203

Test Analog In Screen Test Digital In Screen Test Digital Out Screen Test User Flag Screen Test System Flag Screen Test Printer Screen Test LEDs & Buzzer Screen
WS-0200 400-500 HCMC

See previous page for location


of Control Box LEDs

61301609701 7–57
61301609701 7–58
Section 8 Piping Schematics

FIGURE TITLE DRAWING PAGE

8–1 PIPING COMPONENTS, 433HCMC & 533HCMC — 8–2

8–2 INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM, 433HCMC & PI0029 8–3


533HCMC

8–3 PROCESS DIAGRAM, 433HCMC & 533HCMC PP0006 8–4

8–4 WATER SAVER PACKAGE, MP-129A SK48636 8–8

8–5 PIPING DIAGRAM, MP-129F WATER-SAVER PI0022 8–9

61301609701 8–1
Figure 8–1. PIPING COMPONENTS, 433HCMC & 533HCMC

6SV JACKET
CHAMBER CHAMBER BLEED
JACKET PRESSURE GAUGE PRESSURE GAUGE
This illustration is intended to show PRESSURE GAUGE (CONTROL END) (REMOTE END)
NOTE component locations only. Refer to (REMOTE END) 1PT
RE DOOR 3ST
Parts Catalog 61301609702 for an GASKET
illustrated parts breakdown of this RETRACT 1TR
JACKET
assembly PRESSURE GAUGE CHAMBER C 5SV
(CONTROL END) 6CV
CE DOOR H
GASKET
G to 14SV E
RETRACT to 3CV
PRESSURE METER
CONNECTION
D

8SV
JACKET A

Double Door Units Supplied with


Blowdown Piping
Package (option)
4S

Drain piping is
C C rotated 180˚ on
JACKET
PRESSURE GAUGE
CE DOOR A 16x16 DD Units
2P 6SV GASKET RETRACT G
(CONTROL END)

1SV 5S
Air-In
Filter 8SV 5SV DRAIN
JACKET
BLEED
1ST H Ejector
3SV Vintage 2000 Units
14SV VACUUM TO DOOR(S)
STEAM 3CV HAND VALVE
SUPPLY 2ST
CHAMBER G
PRESSURE GAUGE
1RV (CONTROL END) 2FCV P
2BV E
B A 3ST
4CV F
CHAMBER 1TR
DRAIN D
WATER
SUPPLY
2RT D 2SV H
5CV
1RT 1BV B 6CV
E F
1PT
2
I
3FCV 2
A 1FCV I
12SV
10SV
A STEAM TO DOOR(S)
HAND VALVE

Drain piping is
rotated 180˚ on
16x16 DD Units

UPPER PIPING LOWER PIPING DRAIN A09701 J

8–2
Figure 8–2. INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM, 433HCMC & 533HCMC

61301609701 8–3
Figure 8–3. PROCESS DIAGRAM, 433HCMC & 533HCMC (sheet 1 of 4)

Getinge Sourcing, LLC Doc. Name: Process Diagram, 400/500HC Doc. No.: PP0006 Rev.: C
1777 East Henrietta Road Created By: SEB 07/27/01 File Name: PP0006 Rev C Page 1-2.xls Product: 400/500HC Latest ECO: 121644
Rochester, NY 14623-3133 Approved: SEB 07/27/01 File Type: MS Excel 97 Class Code: 8104 Page: 1 of 5

Pressure T(exp) Pressure T(exp)


grv GRAVITY 1 Cycle 5 pulses P(+pul) vac PREVAC 1 Cycle 3 pulses P(+pul)
grv GRAVITY 2 Cycle 5 pulses vac PREVAC 2 Cycle 3 pulses
f3 FLASH 3+ Cycle 0 pulses Atm vac PREVAC 3 Cycle 3 pulses Atm
f10 FLASH 10+ Cycle 2 pulses (Atm+0.5) (Atm) vac B-D TEST Cycle 3 pulses
9.75 psia
4.75 psia 4.75 psia 4.75 psia
Time Time
Steam to Chamber 1SV DO00 X X C C Steam to Chamber 1SV DO00 X X X X C C
Chamber Drain 2SV DO01 D X X X X X D Chamber Drain 2SV DO01 D X X X X X X X D
Chamber Air-In 3SV DO02 D X S X D Chamber Air-In 3SV DO02 D X X D
Secondary Drain 14SV DO03 C C X X X Secondary Drain 14SV DO03 C C X X X
Water to Ejector 6SV DO05 C X X X D Water to Ejector 6SV DO05 C X X X X X D
Steam to Jacket 8SV DO07 C C C C C C C C C C C Steam to Jacket 8SV DO07 C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
CE & RE Door Seal 10SV DO10 D X X X X X X X X X D CE & RE Door Seal 10SV DO10 D X X X X X X X X X X X X X D
CE & RE Door Unseal 12SV DO11 D D CE & RE Door Unseal 12SV DO11 D D

PH1200

PH1200

PH1200

PH1200
PH0000
PH0500
PH1100

PH1800
PH2000
PH3100
PH3110
PH3800
PH4000

PH0000
PH0500
PH1100

PH1800
PH2000
PH3100
PH3110
PH3800
PH4000
Cycle Phase No.: Cycle Phase No.:

NOTES: 1) Refer to pg 3 for charts, keys & other notes.


2) Refer to pg 4-5 for cycle phase descriptions.

Pressure T(exp) Pressure T(exp)


liq LIQUIDS 1 Cycle lkt LEAK TEST Cycle P(+pul)
liq LIQUIDS 2 Cycle (Atm + 6.0)
Atm Atm

(Atm -0.5) 9.75 psia


4.75 psia 4.75 psia
Time Time
Steam to Chamber 1SV DO00 X C C C Steam to Chamber 1SV DO00 X X X X C C
Chamber Drain 2SV DO01 D X X D Chamber Drain 2SV DO01 D X X X X X X X D
Chamber Air-In 3SV DO02 D X X X D Chamber Air-In 3SV DO02 D X X D
Secondary Drain 14SV DO03 C X C C C C X Secondary Drain 14SV DO03 C C X X X X X
Water to Ejector 6SV DO05 C X X D Water to Ejector 6SV DO05 C X X X X X D
Steam to Jacket 8SV DO07 C C C C C C Steam to Jacket 8SV DO07 C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
CE & RE Door Seal 10SV DO10 D X X X X X X X X X D CE & RE Door Seal 10SV DO10 D X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X D
CE & RE Door Unseal 12SV DO11 D D CE & RE Door Unseal 12SV DO11 D D

PH3190

PH1200

PH1200

PH1200
PH0000
PH0500
PH1100
PH1890
PH1990
PH2090

PH3800
PH4000

PH0000
PH0500
PH1100

PH1800
PH2000
PH3100
PH3110
PH3700
PH3710
PH3800
PH4000
Cycle Phase No.: Cycle Phase No.:

This document contains proprietary information of Getinge Sourcing, LLC. It shall not be reproduced in whole or in part without the authorization of Getinge. Any authorized reproduction must bear this entire legend.

8–4
Figure 8–3. PROCESS DIAGRAM, 433HCMC & 533HCMC (sheet 2 of 4)

Getinge Sourcing, LLC Doc. Name: Process Diagram, 400/500HC Doc. No.: PP0006 Rev.: C
1777 East Henrietta Road
Rochester, NY 14623-3133 Page: 2 of 5

Pressure T(exp) Pressure T(exp)


grv GRAVITY 1 Cycle 5 pulses P(+pul) vac PREVAC 1 Cycle 3 pulses P(+pul)
grv GRAVITY 2 Cycle 5 pulses (Atm) vac PREVAC 2 Cycle 3 pulses (Atm-5.0)
f 3 FLASH 3+ Cycle 0 pulses Atm vac PREVAC 3 Cycle 3 pulses Atm
f10 FLASH 10+ Cycle 2 pulses (Atm+0.5) vac B-D TEST Cycle 3 pulses
with water saver (Atm-5.0) with water saver 9.75 psia (Atm-5.0)
4.75 psia 4.75 psia 4.75 psia
Time Time
Steam to Chamber 1SV DO00 X X C C Steam to Chamber 1SV DO00 X X X X C C
Chamber Drain 2SV DO01 D X X X X X* D Chamber Drain 2SV DO01 D X X X X X X D
Chamber Air-In 3SV DO02 D X S X D Chamber Air-In 3SV DO02 D X X D
Secondary Drain 14SV DO03 C C X X X X Secondary Drain 14SV DO03 C C X X X X
Water to Ejector 6SV DO05 C X X X* D Water to Ejector 6SV DO05 C X X X X D
Steam to Jacket 8SV DO07 C C C C C C C C C C C C Steam to Jacket 8SV DO07 C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
CE & RE Door Seal 10SV DO10 D X X X X X X X X X X D CE & RE Door Seal 10SV DO10 D X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X D
CE & RE Door Unseal 12SV DO11 D D CE & RE Door Unseal 12SV DO11 D D
Water Saver On 15SV DO14 X* X Water Saver On 15SV DO14 X X X X

PH1200

PH3100

PH1200

PH1200

PH1200

PH3100
PH0000
PH0500
PH1100

PH1800
PH2000

PH3110
PH3800
PH4000

PH0000
PH0500
PH1100

PH1800
PH2000

PH3110
PH3800
PH4000
Cycle Phase No.: Cycle Phase No.:

NOTES: 1) X* - For Vac. Dry: DO14 is ON, DO01 & DO05 are OFF.
For Grav. Dry: DO14 is OFF, DO01 & DO05 are ON.
2) Refer to pg 3 for charts, keys & other notes.
Pressure T(exp) 3) Refer to pg 4-5 for cycle phase descriptions.
lkt LEAK TEST Cycle P(+pul)
with water saver
Atm (Atm-5.0)

9.75 psia (Atm-5.0)


4.75 psia 4.75 psia
Time
Steam to Chamber 1SV DO00 X X X X C C
Chamber Drain 2SV DO01 D X X X X X X D
Chamber Air-In 3SV DO02 D X X D
Secondary Drain 14SV DO03 C C X X X X X X
Water to Ejector 6SV DO05 C X X X X D
Steam to Jacket 8SV DO07 C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
CE & RE Door Seal 10SV DO10 D X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X D
CE & RE Door Unseal 12SV DO11 D D
Water Saver On 15SV DO14 X X X X
PH1200

PH1200

PH1200

PH3100
PH0000
PH0500
PH1100

PH1800
PH2000

PH3110
PH3700
PH3710
PH3800
PH4000
Cycle Phase No.:
For units with WATER SAVER PKG ONLY

This document contains proprietary information of Getinge Sourcing, LLC. It shall not be reproduced in whole or in part without the authorization of Getinge. Any authorized reproduction must bear this entire legend.

61301609701 8–5
Figure 8–3. PROCESS DIAGRAM, 433HCMC & 533HCMC (sheet 3 of 4)

Getinge Sourcing, LLC Doc. Name: Process Diagram, 400/500HC Doc. No.: PP0006 Rev.: C
1777 East Henrietta Road
Rochester, NY 14623-3133 Page: 3 of 5

FACTORY SETTINGS NOTES:

Cycle Exposure Drying 1) Refer to Instrumentation Diagram PI0012 for piping schematics
T(exp) Time P(dry) Time and hardware references.
No. Type Type °F (°C) (min.) Type (PSIA) (mm:ss)
* P1 vac PREVAC 1 275.0 (135.0) 3 vac 4.75 16:00 2) Pressure vs. Time cycle phase diagrams are not to scale
* P2 vac PREVAC 1 275.0 (135.0) 3 vac 4.75 16:00
* P3 vac PREVAC 1 275.0 (135.0) 3 vac 4.75 16:00 3) Drain Cooling (5SV) is activated/controlled by 2S at all times while unit is ON.
* P4 vac PREVAC 2 275.0 (135.0) 3 vac 4.75 03:00
* P5 vac PREVAC 2 275.0 (135.0) 3 vac 4.75 03:00 4) Factory Setting for Liquid Dwell Time = 8 minutes
* P6 vac PREVAC 3 275.0 (135.0) 3 vac 4.75 00:00
* P7 vac B-D TEST 273.0 (133.9) 3.5 vac 4.75 00:00 5) 1SV, 2SV & 14SV in some phases are controlled with a fixed limit ramp rate of
P8 grv GRAVITY 1 250.0 (121.1) 30 grv atm 30:00 72.5 PSI/min (see Factory Ramp Rate Settings Table). Normally during these
P9 grv GRAVITY 1 250.0 (121.1) 30 grv atm 30:00 phases, the SV's energize fully and are indicated as such in the phase diagrams
P10 grv GRAVITY 1 250.0 (121.1) 30 grv atm 30:00 and the Cycle Phase Descriptions.
P11 grv GRAVITY 2 275.0 (135.0) 10 grv atm 30:00
P12 grv GRAVITY 2 275.0 (135.0) 10 grv atm 30:00 6) Additional outputs applicable to units with steam generators:
P13 grv GRAVITY 2 275.0 (135.0) 10 grv atm 30:00 a) "Boiler ON" (DO06) turns ON the steam generator while controls
P14 f3 FLASH 3+ 275.0 (135.0) 3 grv atm 00:30 are ON (except during auto blowdown or utility shut-off condition).
P15 f3 FLASH 3+ 275.0 (135.0) 3 grv atm 00:30 b) "Boiler Blowdown" (DO115) turns ON during an auto blowdown event.
P16 f3 FLASH 3+ 275.0 (135.0) 3 grv atm
P17 f3 FLASH 3+ 275.0 (135.0) 3 grv atm 00:30
P18 f10 FLASH 10+ 275.0 (135.0) 10 grv atm 00:30
P19 f10 FLASH 10+ 275.0 (135.0) 10 grv atm 00:30
P20 liq LIQUIDS 1 250.0 (121.1) 30 n/a n/a n/a
P21 liq LIQUIDS 2 250.0 (121.1) 45 n/a n/a n/a
* P22 lkt LEAKTEST 268.0 (131.1) 3 vac 4.75 n/a LEGEND for Cycle Phase Diagrams:

* Available only on the 433/533HC (not available on the 422/522LS) X Energized

De-energized

FACTORY RAMP RATE SETTINGS C Controlled

Cycle Phase Ramp Rate S Energized per selection (e.g. Gravity Dry vs. Vac Dry)
No. Description SV No. (PSI/Min.) Comments
PH1200 Conditioning (Pos) 1SV 72.5 non-adjustable D Energized per door status
PH1200 Conditioning (Neg) 2SV 72.5 non-adjustable
PH1800 Heat Up 1SV, 14SV varying non-adjustable SV Solenoid Valve
PH1890 Liquid Heat Up 1SV, 14SV varying non-adjustable
PH3100 Exhaust 2SV 72.5 non-adjustable DO Digital Output (Software reference)
PH3190 Liquid Exhaust 14SV 0.75 Supervisor adjustable

This document contains proprietary information of Getinge Sourcing, LLC. It shall not be reproduced in whole or in part without the authorization of Getinge. Any authorized reproduction must bear this entire legend.

8–6
Figure 8–3. PROCESS DIAGRAM, 433HCMC & 533HCMC (sheet 4 of 4)

Doc. Name: Process Diagram, 400/500HC Doc. No.: PP0006 Rev.: C Doc. Name: Process Diagram, 400/500HC Doc. No.: PP0006 Rev.: C
Created By: SEB 7/27/01 Product: 400/500HC Class Code: 8104 Created By: SEB 7/27/01 Product: 400/500HC Class Code: 8104
Approved By: SEB 7/27/01 Doc. File Name: PP0006 Rev C Page 4-5 Latest ECO: 121644 Approved By: SEB 7/27/01 Doc. File Name: PP0006 Rev C Page 4-5 Latest ECO: 121644
Approved By: Doc. File Type: MS Word 97 Page: 4 of 5 Approved By: Doc. File Type: MS Word 97 Page: 5 of 5
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________________________
PH3800 – AIR-IN: 3SV & 14SV energize and, for Liquid cycles, 8SV remains de-energized. When chamber pressure is within 2 PSI of
Cycle Phase Descriptions: atmosphere, 3SV & 14SV de-energizes and the phase is complete.

PH0000 – STANDBY: Jacket temperature control is enabled. Jacket RTD maintains temperature by energizing and de-energizing 8SV. 8SV PH4000 – CYCLE COMPLETE: 2SV & 3SV energize and, for Liquid cycles, 8SV remains de-energizes. The cycle complete buzzer sounds for 1
maintains steam to jacket throughout the cycle unless noted in the phase description. Also throughout the cycle, drain temperature switch 2S minute or until clear button is pressed. The door(s) automatically unsealed. When either door is opened, the buzzer will turn OFF (if not already
maintains the drain temperature below 60°C (140°F) by energizing and de-energizing 5SV (water to drain). OFF) and the phase is complete. Note: 2SV & 3SV de-energizes when door is unsealed (sensed by DI02).

PH0500 – CYCLE START: Cycle Start button is pressed, door(s) seals per PH110/PH130 described below. Once jacket temperature is within SEALING DOOR(S): PH110/130 – CE SEALING/DOORS SEALING: 10SV energizes and 12SV de-energizes. Gasket groove is
+4.4 / -2.2°C (+8.0 / -4°F) of T(exp), the phase is complete. pressurized, sealing the chamber.

PH01100 – PURGE: 1SV & 2SV energize. Steam enters the chamber through 1SV and purges chamber of air through 2SV. 6SV energizes if UNSEALING DOOR(S): PH111/131 – CE UNSEALING/DOORS UNSEALING: 10SV remains energized. 12SV & 6SV energize. After 4
chamber pressure exceeds 2 PSI above atmosphere and de-energizes if pressure falls 1 PSI below atmosphere. Cooling water from 6SV seconds, 10SV de-energizes. Water to the ejector creates a vacuum in the gasket groove retracting the door gasket.
condenses steam at ejector and flows to drain. After 90 seconds (for 422/433HC models) or 90 seconds (for 522/533HC models), 1SV, 2SV & After 30 seconds, 6SV de-energizes and the phase is complete.
6SV de-energize and the phase is complete.
PH1200 – CONDITIONING: Note: This phase may be repeated based on the quantity of pulses programmed.
O
x Steam pressurizes chamber through energized 1SV. When chamber pressure reaches P(+pul) (T(exp) – 2.2°C (or 4.0 F) converted to steam
pressure, but no greater than 32.0 PSIA), 1SV de-energizes and 2SV & 6SV energize. Chamber steam is exhausted to ejector, condensed
and drained.
x For Gravity or Flash 10+ Cycles: When chamber pressure reaches 0.5 PSI above atmosphere, 2SV & 6SV de-energizes and the phase is
complete.
st
x For PreVac, B-D TEST or LEAK TEST Cycles – 1 Pulse only: When chamber pressure reaches 9.75 PSIA, 2SV & 6SV de-energizes and
the phase is complete.
nd rd
x For PreVac, B-D TEST or LEAK TEST Cycles – 2 & 3 Pulses only: When chamber pressure reaches 4.75 PSIA, 2SV & 6SV de-
energizes and the phase is complete.
x For PreVac , B-D TEST or LEAK TEST w/ water saver: When chamber pressure reaches 5.0 PSI below atmosphere, 2SV & 6SV de-
energizes. 15SV energizes until 4.75 psia is reached and the phase is complete.
PH1800 – HEAT-UP: 1SV & 14SV energize and steam pressurizes the chamber. As the chamber temperature approaches the programmed
exposure temperature, 1SV & 14SV are controlled (via chamber pressure transducer) to slow down the ascent. When the programmed exposure
temperature +0.4°C (0.7°F) is reached (sensed by the chamber RTD), the phase is then complete.
PH1890 – LIQUID HEAT-UP: 1SV & 14SV energize and steam pressurizes the chamber. As the chamber temperature approaches the
programmed exposure temperature, 1SV & 14SV are controlled (via chamber pressure transducer) to slow down the ascent. When the
programmed exposure temperature is reached (sensed by the chamber RTD), the phase is then complete.
PH1990 – LIQUID DWELL: 14SV is energized & 1SV is controlled to maintain the selected exposure temperature. After a programmed time
period, the phase is complete.
PH2000 – EXPOSURE: The programmed exposure timing begins. 1SV & 14SV are controlled by the chamber RTD to maintain the selected
exposure temperature. After the programmed exposure time expires, 1SV & 14SV de-energizes and the phase is complete.
PH2090 – LIQUID EXPOSURE: The programmed exposure timing begins. 1SV & 14SV are controlled by the chamber RTD to maintain the
selected exposure temperature. After the programmed exposure time expires, 1SV & 14SV de-energizes and the phase is complete.
PH3100 – EXHAUST: 2SV, 6SV, & 14SV energize. Chamber steam is exhausted to ejector, condensed and drained.
x For Gravity Drying: When chamber pressure reaches atmosphere, 2SV, 6SV, & 14SV de-energizes and the phase is complete.
x For Vacuum Drying (including B-D Test & Leak Test Cycles): When chamber pressure reaches 4.75 PSIA, 2SV, 6SV, & 14SV de-
energizes and the phase is complete.
x For Vacuum Drying w/ water saver (including B-D Test & Leak Test Cycles): When chamber pressure reaches 5.0 PSI below
atmosphere, 2SV & 6SV de-energize. 15SV energizes until 4.75 psia is reached and the phase is complete.
PH3190 – LIQUID EXHAUST: 8SV de-energizes. Chamber pressure is decreased at a programmed ramp rate by energizing and de-energizing
14SV. When chamber pressure reaches 6 PSI above atmosphere, 6SV energizes. When the chamber temp reaches 100.0qC / 212.0qF (HCMC:
chamber pressure must also be <= atm pressure), the chamber pressure is decreased at half the programmed ramp rate. When chamber
temperature (sensed by the chamber RTD) cools to <= Atm – 3.5 psia, the phase is complete.
PH3110 – DRYING: The programmed dry timing begins. For unit with ejector only, 2SV & 6SV energize. For unit with a water saver, 14SV and
15SV energize. If Gravity Drying was selected, 3SV also energizes. When the time period elapses, 2SV, 3SV, 6SV, 14SV & 15SV de-energize
and the phase is complete. Note: For Leak Test cycle, the time in this phase is fixed at 15 minutes.
PH3700 – EQUALIZATION: 14SV is energized. All other SV’s, except for door and jacket control, are de-energized. After a dwell period of 5
minutes, the phase is complete.
PH3710 – LEAK TEST: 14SV is energized. All other SV’s, except for door and jacket control, are de-energized. Chamber pressure is initially
checked. After 15 minutes, chamber pressure is checked again to determine leak rate and the phase is complete.

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Getinge Sourcing, LLC. 1777 East Henrietta Road, Rochester NY 14623-3133 Getinge Sourcing, LLC. 1777 East Henrietta Road, Rochester NY 14623-3133

This document contains proprietary information of Getinge Sourcing, LLC. and is subject to being returned upon request. It shall not be This document contains proprietary information of Getinge Sourcing, LLC. and is subject to being returned upon request. It shall not be
reproduced in whole or in part without the authorization of Getinge. Any authorized reproduction must bear this entire legend. reproduced in whole or in part without the authorization of Getinge. Any authorized reproduction must bear this entire legend.

61301609701 8–7
Figure 8–4. WATER SAVER PACKAGE, MP-129A

61301609701 8–8
Figure 8–5. PIPING DIAGRAM, MP-129F WATER-SAVER

61301609701 8–9
61301609701 8–10
Section 9 Electrical Schematics

FIGURE TITLE DRAWING PAGE

9–1 WIRING DIAGRAM, SYSTEM, 400/500 HCMC W1303 9–2


(sheet 1 only)

9–2 WIRING DIAGRAM, POWER BOX 1A A08500 9–3

9–3 WIRING DIAGRAM, CONTROL BOX 2A A08329 9–4

9–4 WIRING DIAGRAM, OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT W1306 9–5

9–5 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, SYSTEM WIRING, W1308 9–6


400/500 HCMC (sheet 1 only)

9–6 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, POWER BOX W1304 9–7

9–7 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, CONTROL OUTPUT W1307 9–8

9–8 WIRING DIAGRAM, MP-129A WATER-SAVER W1297 9–10

9–9 WIRING DIAGRAM, MP-129F WATER SAVER W1320 9–11

61301609701 9–1
Figure 9–1. WIRING DIAGRAM, SYSTEM, 400/500 HCMC

9–2
Figure 9–2. WIRING DIAGRAM, POWER BOX 1A

61301609701 9–3
Figure 9–3. WIRING DIAGRAM, CONTROL BOX 2A

9–4
Figure 9–4. WIRING DIAGRAM, OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

1A3TB3 (BK)
1A3TB4 (W)

1A3TB5 (G)

WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 20 KW


STEAM GENERATOR

1A3TB3 (BK)
1A3TB4 (W)

1A3TB5 (G)
17A1TB1 (BK)
17A1TB2 (W)
17AGND (G)

WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 30 KW


STEAM GENERATOR W1306 400/500 HCMC

61301609701 9–5
Figure 9–5. ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, 433HCMC & 533HCMC

9–6
Figure 9–6. ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, POWER BOX 1A

61301609701 9–7
Figure 9–7. ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, CONTROL OUTPUT (sheet 1 of 2)

9–8
Figure 9–7. ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC, CONTROL OUTPUT (sheet 2 of 2)

61301609701 9–9
Figure 9–8. WIRING DIAGRAM, MP-129A WATER-SAVER

61301609701 9–10
Figure 9–9. WIRING DIAGRAM, MP-129F WATER SAVER

61301609701 9–11
61301609701 9–12
Section 10 Roughing-In Drawings

DRAWING
FIGURE TITLE PAGE
NUMBER

10–1 M/C 3522 STEAM STERILIZER, HS3472 10-2


SD

10–2 M/C 3522 STEAM STERILIZER, HS3473 10–4


DD

10–3 M/C 3533 STEAM STERILIZER, HS3477 10–6


SD

10–4 M/C 3533 STEAM STERILIZER, HS3478 10–8


DD

10–5 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 700337 10-10


3500 (16” x 16”)

10–6 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 700338 10-14


3500 (20” x 20”)

10–7 WATER SAVER PACKAGE HS3472 10–18

The 400/500 HCMC Power Box (Electrical Supply “E”) requires


WARNING a 15 AMP circuit breaker.

61301609701 10–1
Roughing-In Drawings

Figure 10–1. M/C 3522 STEAM STERILIZER, SD (sheet 1 of 2)

10–2
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 10–1. M/C 3522 STEAM STERILIZER, SD (sheet 2 of 2)

61301609701 10–3
Roughing-In Drawings

Figure 10–2. M/C 3522 STEAM STERILIZER, DD (sheet 1 of 2)

10–4
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 10–2. M/C 3522 STEAM STERILIZER, DD (sheet 2 of 2)

61301609701 10–5
Roughing-In Drawings

Figure 10–3. M/C 3533 STEAM STERILIZER, SD (sheet 1 of 2)

10–6
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 10–3. M/C 3533 STEAM STERILIZER, SD (sheet 2 of 2)

61301609701 10–7
Roughing-In Drawings

Figure 10–4. M/C 3533 STEAM STERILIZER, DD (sheet 1 of 2)

10–8
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 10–4. M/C 3533 STEAM STERILIZER, DD (sheet 2 of 2)

61301609701 10–9
Roughing-In Drawings

Figure 10–5. SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 3500 (16” x 16”)(sheet 1 of 4)

10–10
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 10–5. SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 3500 (16” x 16”)(sheet 2 of 4)

61301609701 10–11
Roughing-In Drawings

Figure 10–5. SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 3500 (16” x 16”)(sheet 3 of 4)

10–12
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 10–5. SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 3500 (16” x 16”)(sheet 4 of 4)

61301609701 10–13
Roughing-In Drawings

Figure 10–6. SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 3500 (20” x 20”)(sheet 1 of 4)

10–14
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 10–6. SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 3500 (20” x 20”)(sheet 2 of 4)

61301609701 10–15
Roughing-In Drawings

Figure 10–6. SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 3500 (20” x 20”)(sheet 3 of 4)

10–16
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 10–6. SEISMIC ANCHORAGE, M/C 3500 (20” x 20”)(sheet 4 of 4)

61301609701 10–17
Roughing-In Drawings

Figure 10–7. WATER SAVER PACKAGE (sheet 1 of 2)

10–18
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Figure 10–7. WATER SAVER PACKAGE (sheet 2 of 2)

61301609701 10–19
Roughing-In Drawings

10–20
Appendix A System and User Flags

SYSTEM FLAGS

System flags indicate events that occur in the operating system (C


language) portion of the control software.

Table A–1. System Flags

Flag ID Functional Name Description

SF000 INT I2C ERROR This is an overall I/O error flag indicating communication error with digital
input modules, digital output modules, analog input modules, and analog out-
put modules over the I2C bus.

SF001 PANEL 1 ERROR Communication error with panel 1 (control end).

SF002 PANEL 2 ERROR Communication error with panel 2 (remote end).

SF003 RS232 COM. ERROR Communication error at RS232 channel.

SF004 RS485 COM. ERROR Communication error at RS485 channel.

SF005 ANYBUS COM. ERROR Communication error at AnyBus channel.

SF006 PRINT COM. ERROR Communication error with printer connected to PACS 3000.

SF007 Not used.


SF008
SF009
SF010

SF011 OP21 MASTER First panel is master. SF11 – SF15 are used for handling the master/slave
concept for operator panels and are controlled by the Boolean program. One
of the panels is defined as the master panel, all others are slaves. The master
panel is accepted to start a program and to change the program parameters.

SF012 OP22 MASTER Second paster is master.

SF013 RS232 MASTER RS232 is master.

SF014 RS485 MASTER Not used by this sterilizer model.


SF015 ANYBUS MASTER

SF016 PIT EXCEEDED This flag is set if the power supply has been interrupted longer than the Power
Interrupt Time set in the system configuration.

SF017 SERVICE ALARM Not used for this sterilizer model.


SF018 STEP FLAG

61301609701 A–1
System and User Flags

Table A–1. System Flags

Flag ID Functional Name Description

SF019 ON OFF FLAG Toggled every 250 ms.

SF020 BLANK TEXT Resets all information and error text if set. The system resets this flag.

SF021 CYCLE EXECUTED This flag should be set for every executed sterilizer cycle in order to increment
the service interval cycle counter. The system resets this flag.

SF022 START LOG This flag is used for starting and stopping the PACS 3000 and panels logging.
It also starts and stops the graphics in process pictures.

SF023 SLOW LOG Activates the long logging interval set in the printer definition menu (non-
exposure phases when in cycle).

SF024 FAST LOG Activates the short logging interval set in the printer definition menu (expo-
sure and liquid exposure phases only).

SF025 ALARM PHASE Alarm phase PH9998 is activated when this flag is set.

SF026 BUZZER All panel buzzers are activated when this flag is set.

SF027 BCKUP PROM ERROR Not used for this sterilizer model.
SF028 PC PRINT LOG

SF029 PC DISK LOG The log sent to the CS100/CS1000 is stored on disk if this flag is set.

SF030 MS250 EXCEEDED Execution time 250ms exceeded.

SF031 LOG A log is printed out when this flag is set.

SF032 AI. CH 00 ERROR Indicates an error at the analog input channel 0. The flag is reset if the input is
resumed.

SF033 AI. CH 01 ERROR Indicates an error at the analog input channel 1. The flag is reset if the input is
resumed.

SF034 AI. CH 02 ERROR Not used for this sterilizer model.

SF035 AI. CH 03 ERROR Indicates an error at the analog input channel 3. The flag is reset if the input is
resumed.

SF036 AI CH 04 ERROR Not used by this sterilizer model.


thru
SF063 AI CH 31 ERROR

SF064 P01 Program selection flags. 433HCMC & 533HCMC has 22 cycles.
thru
SF087 P22

SF088 P23 Not used by this sterilizer model.


thru thru
SF127 P64

A–2
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Table A–1. System Flags

Flag ID Functional Name Description

SF128 DO MOD. 0 ERROR This flag is set if communication with Digital Output module 0 has failed 10
times in sequence. Resets at power up.

SF129 DO MOD. 1 ERROR This flag is set if communication with Digital Output module 1 has failed 10
times in sequence. Resets at power up.

SF130 DO MOD 2 ERROR Not used by this sterilizer model.


thru
SF135 DO MOD 7 ERROR

SF136 DI MOD. 0 ERROR This flag is set if communication with Digital Input module 0 has failed 10
times in sequence. Resets at power up.

SF137 DI MOD. 1 ERROR This flag is set if communication with Digital Input module 1 has failed 10
times in sequence. Resets at power up.

SF138 DI MOD 2 ERROR Not used by this sterilizer model.


thru
SF143 DI MOD7 ERROR

SF144 AO MOD 0 ERROR Not used by this sterilizer model.


thru
SF147 AO MOD 3 ERROR

SF148 ENTER PASSWORD Not used by this sterilizer model.


SF149 CORRECT PASSW

SF150 PRINT LABEL Not used by this sterilizer model.

SF151 MANUAL MODE SET This flag is set if any digital output is in manual mode.

SF152 AI MOD 0 ERROR Not used for this sterilizer model.


thru
SF161 AI MOD 9 ERROR

SF162 LOG VAR 1 – 20 This flag indicates which log group is printed.

SF163 LOG VAR 21 – 40 Not used by this sterilizer model.


SF164 LOG VAR 41 - 60

SF165 BATTERY LOW This flag is set when the battery power is low.

SF166 PRINTER BUSY Printer is busy.

SF167 PRINT REALTIME Prints real time and date

SF168 SUPER TO PACS 1 Not used for this sterilizer model.


thru
SF172 SUPER TO PACS 5

61301609701 A–3
System and User Flags

Table A–1. System Flags

Flag ID Functional Name Description

SF173 PACS TO SUPER 1 Not used for this sterilizer model.


thru
SF177 PACS TO SUPER 5

SF178 NO PASSWORD Not used for this sterilizer model.

SF179 CORRECT PROCESS Set after a correct process and remaining time is updated.

SF180 BATCH READY Not used for this sterilizer model.

SF181 MORE BUTTONS Forces the display into “More Buttons” mode.

SF182 SCREEN ON/OFF Associated with the CONTROLS ON/OFF button. Set when the controls are
OFF. Resets when the controls are ON.

SF183 CYCLE SELECTED Sets after the ENTER button is pressed when selecting a new cycle. Resets
after one second.

SF184 Not Used


thru
SF256

A–4
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

USER FLAGS

User flags indicate events that occur in the application program (Boolean
language) portion of the control software.

Table A–2. User Flags

Flag ID Functional Name Description

UF000 Process Failure Set when process failure occurs.

UF001 Start OK Set when cycle can be started (no failure conditions, doors OK).

UF002 Door Unseal OK Set when chamber pressure is within 2 psi of atmosphere.

UF003 Not Used

UF004 In Progress Set when cycle is in progress.

UF005 Cycle Good Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF006 Always True Flag Set always.

UF007 Uni RE-Enabled Not used for this sterilizer model.


UF008 UniCE unsld Last
UF009 UniRE unsld Last

UF010 Negative Pulse 1 Set when negative pulse 1 is in progress (first pulse).

UF011 Negative Pulse 2 Set when negative pulse 2 is in progress (subsequent pulses).

UF012 Chamber Temp Low Set when chamber temperature is below allowable range.

UF013 Not Used

UF014 Clear Pressed Set when CLEAR/ALARM is pressed.

UF015 Not Used

UF016 Loss of Dr Sw Set when door switch or pressure switch input is lost.

UF017 Start phs Set when the controls are in the Start phase.

UF018 Purge phs Set when controls are in the Purge stage.

UF019 Standby phs Set when the controls are in the Standby phase.

UF020 Cycle Complete Set when the controls are in the Cycle Complete phase.

UF021 Not Used


UF022
UF023

61301609701 A–5
System and User Flags

Table A–2. User Flags

Flag ID Functional Name Description

UF024 End Liq Exh Service diagnostic flag. If the door has been manually retracted during a cycle,
this flag is set in Liq Exhaust so the controls have a way to exit the phase.

UF025 Liq Exh Too Fast Set when the Liquid Exhaust phase exceeds the programmed rate.

UF026 Fo Auto Selected Not used for this sterilizer model


UF027 LoadPb – Config
UF028 Load Probe Instr

UF029 Liquid Cycle Set when a liquid cycle is selected.

UF030 Liq Lev – 1sec Set when liquid is detected in the drain for 1 second. Secondary drain valve
14SV opens.

UF031 Liq Lev – 6sec Set when liquid is detected in the drain for 6 seconds. Ejector and chamber
drain valve 2SV opens.

UF032 Liq Lev – 11sec Set when liquid is detected in the drain for 11 seconds. WATER IN DRAIN
message occurs.

UF033 Fault non cyc/dr Set when a fault occurs when not in cycle.

UF034 Press Low in Tnk Not Used for this sterilizer model.

UF035 D/D Doors Closed Set when both doors are closed (double door units).

UF036 S/D Door Closed Set when door is closed (single door units).

UF037 Not Used

UF038 Gravity Dry Jump Set when gravity dry is selected.

UF039 Chmbr TmpLow Blk Set when exposure temperature is low.

UF040 Chk for Temp Low When set, the controls check for low temperature during the Exposure phase.

UF041 Reached Neg Pul Set when negative pulse setpoint is reached.

UF042 Not Used

UF043 Dr Sw Fail T/O Set when there has been an automatic ABORT - DR SW while in cycle.

UF044 Buff TI Complete Set when a non-RTD related error is seen and has been present for more than
1 second.

UF045 Start Buff TI Set when a non-RTD related fault or failure occurs. Starts a 1 second buffer
which prevents momentary conditions from causing a fault or failure.

UF046 WS - Config Set when the unit is configured with the water saver option.

UF047 Unit – 400 Set when unit is configured as a 400 Series.

A–6
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Table A–2. User Flags

Flag ID Functional Name Description

UF048 Unit – 500 Set when unit is configured as a 500 Series.

UF049 S/Fair Tnk - Config Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF050 Not Used

UF051 USD – Config Set when unit is configured with the utility shutdown option.

UF052 Vac Pmp – Config Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF053 Jkt Byps Config Set when unit is configured with the jacket bypass option.

UF054 Already Jumped Set after the CYCLE RESULTS section has been printed following a good
cycle.

UF055 Set MORE This is set to allow a phase to be manually advanced or aborted.

UF056 Set Abort BT This is set to allow a phase to be manually aborted.

UF057 Set Phs Adv BT This is set to allow a phase to be manually advanced.

UF058 Not Used

UF059 Cycle Aborted Set when cycle is aborted.

UF060 Start RTD Buf TI Set when an RTD related fault or failure occurs. Starts a 3 second buffer which
prevents momentary conditions from causing a fault or failure.

UF061 RTD Buf TI Cmplt Set when an RTD related error is seen and has been present for more than 3
seconds.

UF062 Manual Abort Act Set when a cycle has been manually aborted.

UF063 Not Used


UF064

UF065 At Temp Set when the chamber temperature is greater than the exposure setpoint.
Reset when the temperature is below the setpoint.

UF066 Timer Started Set when the chamber temperature is greater than the exposure setpoint for
the first time. Stays set until the cycle is complete.

UF069 Fault in cyc/dr Set when a fault or failure occurs when in cycle.

UF070 Open CE Door Set when appropriate condition is satisfied that tells the controls to open the
CE Door.

UF071 Close CE Door Set when appropriate condition is satisfied that tells the controls to close the
CE Door.

UF072 Seal CE Door Set when appropriate condition is satisfied that tells the controls to seal the CE
Door.

61301609701 A–7
System and User Flags

Table A–2. User Flags

Flag ID Functional Name Description

UF073 Unseal CE Door Set when appropriate condition is satisfied that tells the controls to unseal the
CE Door.

UF074 Open RE Door Set when appropriate condition is satisfied that tells the controls to open the
RE Door.

UF075 Close RE Door Set when appropriate condition is satisfied that tells the controls to close the
RE Door.

UF076 Seal RE Door Not used for this sterilizer model.


UF077 Unseal RE Door

UF078 Not Used

UF079 Exp Dropout RESET - TEMP LOW situation. Controls exit Exposure and go back to Heat-
Up to heat the chamber.

UF080 Liq Exp Dropout RESET - TEMP LOW situation. Controls exit Liquid Exposure and go back to
Liquid Heat-Up to heat the chamber.

UF081 121.1/250 Cycle Not Used

UF082 135.0/275 Cycle Not Used

UF083 Jkt<= 126.6 liq Set when the jacket temperature at the start of purge is less than or equal to
126.6°C (liquid cycle only).

UF080 Not Used.


UF081
UF082
UF083

UF084 Mt DD-S Seal Set to maintain a door seal (hold DO10 on). (standard double door unit)

UF085 Mt DD-S Unseal Set to maintain a door unseal (hold DO11 on). (standard double door unit)

UF086 Mt CE Seal Set to maintain a control end (CE) door seal (hold DO10 on). (single door
units)

UF087 Mt RE Seal Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF088 Mt CE Unseal Set to maintain a control end (CE) door unseal (hold DO011 on). (single door
units)

UF089 Mt RE Unseal Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF090 Not Used

UF091 SD Power Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF092 Not Used

A–8
433HCMC & 533HCMC Steam Sterilizers

Table A–2. User Flags

Flag ID Functional Name Description

UF093 DD P-Standard Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF094 Not Used

UF095 DD P-Unidirect Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF096 Not Used

UF097 DD P-Interlock Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF098 Not Used


UF099
UF100
UF101

UF102 Seal Other Door Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF103 Not Used


UF104
UF105

UF106 Alarm Enable Set when an alarm is enabled.

UF107 CC: Print TOD Set after time of day has been printed following a complete cycle.

UF108 Process Alarm Set when a phase-specific error condition occurs during cycle.

UF109 System Alarm Set when an error condition occurs during cycle.

UF110 Alarm Silence Set when CLEAR/ALARM is pressed to silence the alarm tone.

UF111 Not Used


UF112

UF113 Start TI Fo Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF114 P-meters Low Set when the controls have read a low Parameter Check value.

UF115 Prt Actual Time Set when controls have been turned OFF, then ON while in cycle.

UF116 Controls Off Set when the controls have been turned OFF.

UF117 Text on scrn -usd Set if CE DOOR OPEN, RE DOOR OPEN, BATTERY LOW, or MANUAL
MODE info text is visible and the controls are in Utility Shutdown mode.

UF118 Utility Shutdown Set when the controls are in Utility Shutdown mode.

UF119 Manual Phs Adv Set when the PHS ADV softkey has been pressed. Resets after the advance
has been executed.

UF120 Not Used


UF121

61301609701 A–9
System and User Flags

Table A–2. User Flags

Flag ID Functional Name Description

UF122 BBD subphs 1 Not used for this sterilizer model.

UF123 Man Phs Adv Code Set when a cycle has been manually advanced.

UF124 Not Used


UF125

UF126 USD Pause Set when Utility Shutdown mode has been paused.

UF127 Not Used

A–10
Numerics Alarm Silence flag (UF110) A–9
Already Jumped flag (UF054) A–7
400 series seismic anchorage drawing 10–10, 10–11, 10–12, Always True Flag flag (UF006) A–5
10–13
analog inputs, viewing 3–5, 7–46
400/500 series
piping package 8–2 analog outputs (not used) 7–45
roughing-in drawings 10–2 assigning
system wiring diagram 9–2 passwords 7–40
500 series seismic anchorage drawing 10–14, 10–15, 10–16, sterilizer name (machine name) 7–34
10–17 At Temp flag (UF065) A–7
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION - HIGH REF screen 4–11, 4–15,
A 4–20
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION - LOW REF screen 4–11, 4–15,
abort (manual) 1–10 4–20, 4–23
ABORT MANUAL message 2–14 AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION screen 4–10, 4–14, 4–19, 4–22,
ABORT softkey 1–10 7–23
ABORT-AIR REMOVAL message 2–5
ABORT-DOOR SW message 2–5
B
ABORT-EXH SLOWED message 2–5 BAR GRAPH screen 1–6, 7–11
ABORT-HEAT-UP message 2–6 BATTERY LOW flag (SF165) A–3
ABORT-HIGH TEMP message 2–6 BATTERY LOW message 2–7
ABORT-LIQexh SLOW message 2–6 battery replacement
ABORT-SLOW STEAM message 2–7 control board 2–7
ABOUT screen 4–32, 7–13 BLANK TEXT flag (SF020) A–2
accessing menu tree BOOLEAN CODE access 1–14
CALENDAR screen 7–20 BOOLEAN PASSWORD access 1–14
CALIBRATION menu 7–20, 7–23
CONFIGURATION menu 7–32 BRIDGE COMPENSATION screen 5–8, 7–26
DIPSWITCHES screen 7–42 bridge compensation table 2–9, 5–8, 5–9
DOCUMENTATION menu 7–27
PASSWORDS screen 7–40 brightness of display, adjusting 4–32
SAVE RAM TO FLASH screen 7–52 Buff TI Complete flag (UF044) A–6
SERVICE menu 7–43
SYSTEM menu 7–12 BUZZER flag (SF026) A–2

adding user to password list 7–41 buzzer, adjusting volume 4–32

adjustments
brightness of display 4–32 C
buzzer volume 4–32
pressure switch (door gasket) 4–28 CALENDAR access 1–14, 7–21
AI. CH 01 ERROR flag (SF033) A–2 CALENDAR screen 7–19, 7–21
AI. CH 02 ERROR flag (SF034) A–2 calendar, setting 7–21
AI. CH 03 ERROR FLAG (SF035) A–2 calibration
automatic method 4–2, 7–24
AIR-IN SLOW message 2–7
chamber RTD 4–18
alarm buzzer, secondary 4–32 checking 4–4
ALARM CLOCK screen 6–3, 7–22 jacket RTD 4–22
manual method 4–2, 7–25
Alarm Enable flag (UF106) A–9 pressure transducer 4–2, 4–3, 4–8, 7–24
ALARM PHASE flag (SF025) A–2 special tools 4–17

61301609701 I–1
temperature sensors 7–24 LANGUAGE DATE UNITS screen 7–36
temperature sensors (using test plugs) 4–2, 4–17 MACHINE NAME screen 7–34
PANEL SETUP screen 7–38
CALIBRATION access 1–14, 4–8, 4–10, 4–13, 4–14, 4–17, 4–
22, 5–8, 5–15, 5–19, 7–24, 7–25, 7–26 CONFIGURE PRINTER LOG VALUES screen 7–30, 7–31
calibration check control box (2A)
pressure and temperature verification 4–5 electrical schematic 9–8
set up 4–4 wiring diagram 9–4
special tools 4–4
control system
CALIBRATION menu wiring diagram 9–2
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION screen 7–24
control system adjustments
BRIDGE COMPENSATION screen 7–26
buzzer volume 4–32
MANUAL CALIBRATION screen 7–25
display brightness 4–32
CC Print TOD flag (UF107) A–9
control system maintenance
CE DOOR OPEN message 2–14 replacing flash EPROM 5–10
replacing pressure transducer 5–5
CE NOT SEALED message 2–8
replacing temperature sensors (RTDs) 5–3
CE NOT UNSEALED message 2–8
controls and indicators
CHAM RTD ERROR message 2–8 CLEAR/ALARM switch 1–5
CHAMBER pressure gauge 1–7 CLOSE DOOR switch 1–5
CONTROLS OFF/ON switch 1–5
chamber RTD cycle switches 1–5
calibrating 4–18 directional arrows 1–5
insertion depth 5–4 DOOR(S) CLOSED indicator 1–6
replacing 5–4 DOOR(S) SEALED indicator 1–6
Chamber Temp Low flag (UF012) A–5 ENTER switch 1–5
IN PROCESS indicator 1–6
changing OPEN DOOR switch 1–5
cycle name 7–33 operator panel 1–4
cycle number 7–33 PROCESS COMPLETE 1–6
CHECK BCT VALUES message 2–9 PROCESS FAILURE indicator 1–6
programming switches 1–5
Chk for Temp Low flag (UF040) A–6 START switch 1–5
Chmbr TmpLow Blk flag (UF039) A–6 status indicators 1–6
UP ARROW softkey 1–5
Clear Pressed flag (UF014) A–5
Controls Off flag (UF116) A–9
CLEAR/ALARM switch 1–5, 2–3
CONTROLS OFF/ON switch 1–5
clock, setting 7–21
CORRECT PROCESS flag (SF179) A–4
Close CE Door flag (UF071) A–7
Cycle Aborted flag (UF059) A–7
CLOSE DOOR switch 1–5
CYCLE ADVANCED message 2–15
Close RE Door flag (UF075) A–8
Cycle Complete flag (UF020) A–5
closing door
manual door 1–8 CYCLE EXECUTED flag (SF021) A–2
cold start button (on CPU Board) 5–16 Cycle Good flag (UF005) A–5
cold start procedure 5–16 cycle name, changing 7–33
component locations cycle number, changing 7–33
piping 8–2 cycle parameter popup screen 7–16
CONFIGURATION access 1–14, 6–3, 7–22, 7–33, 7–34, 7– cycle parameters (HC)
36, 7–38 flash 10+ 1–17
CONFIGURATION menu flash 3+ 1–16
ALARM CLOCK screen 7–22 gravity 1–15
EDIT CYCLES screen 7–33 leak test 1–20

I–2
liquids 1–18 CE NOT SEALED 2–8
prevacuum 1–19 CE NOT UNSEALED 2–8
CHAM RTD ERROR 2–8
CYCLE SELECTED flag (SF183) A–4
CHECK BCT VALUES 2–9
cycle types (HC) DI 00-07 COM ERR 2–9
flash 10+ 1–17 DI 08-15 COM ERR 2–9
FLASH 3+ 1–17 DO 00-07 COM ERR 2–9
flash 3+ 1–16 DO 08-15 COM ERR 2–10
gravity 1–15 DO 16-23 COM ERR 2–10
leak test 1–20 DOOR SWITCH FAIL 2–10
liquids 1–18 DOORS NOT SEALED 2–10
prevacuum 1–19 DOORS NOT UNSLD 2–11
cycle worksheets (HC) failure conditions 1–10, 2–1
flash 10+ 1–17 fault conditions 1–10, 2–1
flash 3+ 1–16 informational messages 2–2
gravity cycle 1–15 JACKET OVER-TEMP 2–11
leak test 1–20 JKT RTD ERROR 2–11
liquids 1–18 LEAK TEST FAIL 2–12
prevacuum 1–19 level 1 troubleshooting 2–3
level 2 troubleshooting 2–3
POWER FAILED 2–12
D PRESS ERROR 2–12
PRESS IN CHAMBER 2–13
D/D Doors Closed flag (UF035) A–6 RESET-TEMP LOW 2–13
WATER IN DRAIN 2–13
data entry popup screen 7–6
digital inputs, viewing 3–6
date, setting 7–21
digital outputs, operating manually 3–7
DD P-Interlock flag (UF097) A–9
DIPSWITCHES
DD P-Standard (UF093) A–9 400 series/500 series 4–26
DD P-Unidirect flag (UF095) A–9 DS01 SD=0 DD=1 (single door/double door) 4–26
DS08 Utility S.D. 4–27
deleting user from password list 7–41
DS11 Parameter Check 4–27
DETAILS screen 1–6, 7–10
DIPSWITCHES screen 5–16, 7–42
DI 00-07 COM ERR message 2–9 door configuration 4–26
DI 08-15 COM ERR message 2–9 directional arrows 1–5
DI MOD. 0 ERROR flag (SF136) A–3 display brightness adjustment 4–32
DI MOD. 1 ERROR flag (SF137) A–3 display screens
ABOUT 4–32, 7–13
DIAGNOSTIC menu
ALARM CLOCK 6–3, 7–22
LED/BUZZER screen 7–51
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION 4–10, 4–14, 4–19, 4–22, 7–
PRINTER screen 7–51
23
TEST ANALOG IN screen 7–46
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION - HIGH REF 4–11, 4–15, 4–
TEST DIGITAL IN screen 7–47
20
TEST DIGITAL OUT screen 7–48
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION - LOW REF 4–11, 4–15, 4–
TEST SYSTEM FLAG screen 7–50
20, 4–23
TEST USER FLAG screen 7–49
BAR GRAPH 1–6, 7–11
diagnostic messages BRIDGE COMPENSATION 5–8, 7–26
ABORT-AIR REMOVAL 2–5 CALENDAR 7–21
ABORT-DOOR SW 2–5 CALIBRATION menu 7–20, 7–23
ABORT-EXH SLOWED 2–5 CONFIGURATION menu 7–32
ABORT-HEAT-UP 2–6 CONFIGURE PRINTER LOG VALUES 7–30, 7–31
ABORT-HIGH TEMP 2–6 cycle parameter popup 7–16
ABORT-LIQexh 2–6 data entry popup 7–6
ABORT-SLOW STEAM 2–7 DETAILS 1–6, 7–10
AIR-IN SLOW 2–7 DIAGNOSTIC menu 7–45
BATTERY LOW 2–7

61301609701 I–3
DIPSWITCHES 4–26, 5–16, 7–42 DOORS NOT SEALED message 2–10
DOCUMENTATION menu 7–27
DOORS NOT UNSLD message 2–11
EDIT CYCLES 5–20, 7–33
EDIT PARAMETERS (full edit) 7–17 Dr Sw Fail T/O flag (UF043) A–6
EDIT PARAMETERS (quick edit) 7–15 drying method, gravity cycle 1–15
ENTER PASSWORD 7–5
ERROR LOG 3–2, 3–3, 7–44 drying recommendations 1–16, 1–19
ERROR LOG -MORE INFO 3–4
full edit 7–17 E
LANGUAGE DATE UNITS 7–36
MACHINE NAME 7–34
MACHINE NAME ENTRY 7–35 EDIT CYCLES screen 5–20, 7–33
MANUAL CALIBRATION 5–15, 7–25 EDIT PARAMETERS screen
PANEL SETUP 7–38 full edit 7–17
password entry 7–5
EDIT PARAMETERS screen (quick edit) 7–15
PASSWORDS 7–40
PLOT GRAPH 1–6, 7–11 editing
PRINTER 7–29 cycle parameters (full edit mode) 7–17
PRINTOUT CYCLE 7–28 cycle parameters (quick edit mode) 7–15
quick edit 7–15
electrical schematics
SAVE RAM TO FLASH 5–10, 7–52
control box wiring 9–4
SELECT CYCLE 7–14
control outputs 9–8
SERVICE menu 7–43
power box (1A) 9–7
SETUP menu 7–9
power box wiring 9–3
SYSTEM menu 7–12, 7–19
system wiring 9–2
TEST ANALOG IN 3–2, 3–5, 7–46
TEST DIGITAL IN 3–2, 3–6, 7–47 enabling optional equipment
TEST DIGITAL OUT 3–2, 3–7, 7–48 jacket bypass 4–27
TEST LED/BUZZER 3–2 liquid RTD 4–27
TEST PRINTER 3–2 T-Doc 4–27
TEST SYSTEM FLAG 3–2, 3–10, 7–50 vacuum pump 4–27
TEST USER FLAG 3–2, 3–11, 7–49 water-saver 4–27
VIEW PARAMETERS (full edit) 7–17 enabling software features
VIEW PARAMETERS (quick edit) 7–15 parameter check 4–27
DO 00-07 COM ERR message 2–9 utilities control 4–27
DO 08-15 COM ERR message 2–10 End Liq Exh flag (UF024) A–6
DO 16-23 COM ERR message 2–10 ENTER PASSWORD screen 7–5
DO MOD. 0 ERROR flag (SF128) A–3 ENTER switch 1–5
DO MOD. 1 ERROR flag (SF129) A–3 ENTER TO EDIT message 2–15
DOCUMENTATION access 1–14, 7–28, 7–29, 7–30 entering
alphanumeric value 7–5
DOCUMENTATION menu
data value 7–6
CONFIGURE PRINTER LOG VALUES screen 7–30
password 7–5
PRINTER screen 7–29
PRINTOUT CYCLE screen 7–28 ERROR LOG - MORE INFO screen 3–4
door configurations ERROR LOG screen 3–2, 3–3, 7–44
double door (standard) 1–12 error log, viewing 3–3
single door 1–12
exiting display screen 7–8
door interlock switches 3–13
Exp Dropout flag (UF079) A–8
DOOR SWITCH FAIL message 2–10
Door Unseal OK flag (UF002) A–5 F
DOOR(S) CLOSED indicator 1–6
DOOR(S) SEALED indicator 1–6 factory settings (HC)
B-D TEST 1–2, 1–19

I–4
FLASH 10+ 1–2, 1–17 cycle worksheet 1–16
FLASH 3+ 1–2, 1–16 factory settings 1–16
GRAVITY 1 1–2, 1–15
flash EPROM
GRAVITY 2 1–2, 1–15
clearing CPU Board memory 5–16
LEAK TEST 1–20
entering configuration settings 5–19
LEAKTEST 1–2
entering the customer’s settings 5–20
LIQUIDS 1 1–18
entering transducer data 5–19
LIQUIDS 2 1–18
installing 5–18
LIQUIDS1 1–2
recording calibration data 5–10
LIQUIDS2 1–2
recording sterilizer configuration 5–15
PREVAC 1 1–2, 1–19
recording the customer’s settings 5–12
PREVAC 2 1–2
removing 5–16
PREVAC3 1–2
replacing 5–10
failure conditions 1–10 special tools 5–10
ABORT HEAT-UP 2–6
Fo Auto Selected flag (UF026) A–6
ABORT-AIR REMOVAL 2–5
ABORT-EXH SLOWED 2–5 full edit mode
ABORT-HIGH TEMP 2–6 editing parameters 7–17
ABORT-LIQexh 2–6 selecting 7–39
ABORT-SLOW STEAM 2–7 viewing parameters 7–17
AIR-IN SLOW 2–7
ANORT-DOOR SW 2–5 G
CHAM RTD ERROR 2–8
DI 00-07 COM ERR 2–9
DO 00-07 COM ERR 2–9 gravity cycle (HC)
DO 08-15 COM ERR 2–10 cycle parameters 1–15
DO 16-23 COM ERR 2–10 cycle worksheet 1–15
JACKET OVER-TEMP 2–11 drying method 1–15
JKT RTD FAILURE 2–11 drying recommendation 1–16
POWER FAILED 2–12 factory settings 1–15
PRESS ERROR 2–12 Gravity Dry Jump flag (UF038) A–6
WATER IN DRAIN 2–13
FAST LOG flag (SF024) A–2 H
fast log interval 7–29
fault conditions 1–10 hardware configuration (DIPSWITCHES)
AIR-IN SLOW 2–7 door configuration 4–26
BATTERY LOW 2–7 model configuration (400/500) 4–26
CE NOT SEALED 2–8 optional equipment 4–27
CE NOT UNSEALED 2–8 HARDWARE SETUP access 4–26, 4–27, 5–16, 7–42
CHECK BCT VALUES 2–9
DI 08-15 COM ERR 2–9
DOOR SWITCH FAIL 2–10
I
DOORS NOT SEALED 2–10
DOORS NOT UNSLD 2–11 IN PROCESS indicator 1–6
LEAK TEST FAIL 2–12 In Progress flag (UF004) A–5
PRESS IN CHAMBER 2–13
RESET-TEMP LOW 2–13 informational messages
WATER IN DRAIN 2–13 ABORT MANUAL 2–14
CE DOOR OPEN 2–14
Fault in cyc/dr flag (UF069) A–7 CYCLE ADVANCED 2–15
Fault non cyc/dr flag (UF033) A–6 ENTER TO EDIT 2–15
LOW CYCLE VALUES 2–15
flash 10+ cycle
LOW POWER BROWN OUT 2–15
cycle worksheet 1–17
MANUAL MODE 2–16
factory settings 1–17
RE DOOR OPEN 2–16
FLASH 3+ cycle 1–17 UTILITY SHUTDOWN 2–16
WAIT FOR JACKET 2–16
flash 3+ cycle 1–16

61301609701 I–5
input/output LEDs LOG flag (SF031) A–2
on CM1 Board 2U 3–7
log value
insertion depth item list 7–31
chamber RTD 5–4 type list 7–30
jacket RTD 5–4
LOG VAR 1 – 20 flag (SF162) A–3
INT I2C ERROR flag (SF000) A–1
Loss of Dr Sw flag (UF016) A–5
LOW CYCLE VALUES message 2–15
J
LOW POWER BROWN OUT message 2–15, 3–14
JACKET OVER-TEMP message 2–11
JACKET pressure gauge 1–7
M
jacket RTD
MACHINE NAME ENTRY screen 7–35
calibrating 4–22
insertion depth 5–4 MACHINE NAME screen 7–34
replacing 5–4 machine name, assigning 7–34
Jkt Byps Config flag (UF053) A–7 maintenance
JKT RTD ERROR message 2–11 control system 5–3
door 5–25
Jkt<= 126.6 liq flag (UF083)> A–8
piping system 5–23
Man Phs Adv Code flag (UF123) A–10
L
manual abort
during a timed phase 1–10
LANGUAGE DATE UNITS screen 7–36
during an untimed phase 1–10
leak test cycle (HC)
Manual Abort Act flag (UF062) A–7
cycle parameters 1–20
cycle worksheet 1–20 MANUAL CALIBRATION screen 5–15, 7–25
factory settings 1–20
manual door
LEAK TEST FAIL message 2–12 closing 1–8
opening 1–8
LED/BUZZER screen 7–51
manual mode 3–7
lift/swing door
adjustments 4–35 MANUAL MODE message 2–16
maintenance 5–25
MANUAL MODE SET flag (SF151) A–3
Liq Exh Too Fast flag (UF025) A–6
manual operation of solenoid valves 3–7
Liq Exp Droput flag (UF080) A–8
Manual Phs Adv flag (UF119) A–9
Liq Lev – 11sec flag (UF032) A–6
menu tree
Liq Lev – 1sec flag (UF030) A–6 CALENDAR screen 7–20
CALIBRATION menu 7–20, 7–23
Liq Lev – 6sec flag (UF031) A–6
CONFIGURATION menu 7–32
Liquid Cycle flag (UF029) A–6 DIPSWITCHES screen 7–42
liquids cycle (HC) DOCUMENTATION menu 7–27
cycle parameters 1–18 PASSWORDS screen 7–40
cycle worksheet 1–18 SAVE RAM TO FLASH screen 7–52
factory settings 1–18 SYSTEM MENU 7–12

Load Probe Instr flag (UF028) A–6 menu tree diagram 7–53

loading car 1–13 menu tree navigation


entering a data value 7–6
loading equipment entering a password 7–5
loading car and transfer carriage 1–13 entering an alphanumeric value 7–5
rack and shelves 1–13 exiting a display screen 7–8
LoadPb – Config flag (UF027) A–6 select an item 7–4

I–6
selecting a setup option 7–7 Mt RE Unseal flag (UF089) A–8
messages
ABORT MANUAL 2–14 N
ABORT-AIR REMOVAL 2–5
ABORT-DOOR SW 2–5 naming a cycle 7–33
ABORT-EXH SLOWED 2–5
ABORT-HEAT-UP 2–6 Negative Pulse 1 flag (UF010) A–5
ABORT-HIGH TEMP 2–6 Negative Pulse 2 flag (UF011) A–5
ABORT-LIQexh SLOW 2–6
ABORT-SLOW STEAM 2–7
AIR-IN SLOW 2–7 O
BATTERY LOW 2–7
CE DOOR OPEN 2–14 ON OFF FLAG flag (SF019) A–2
CE NOT SEALED 2–8
OP21 MASTER flag (SF011) A–1
CE NOT UNSEALED 2–8
CHAM RTD ERROR 2–8 OP22 MASTER flag (SF012) A–1
CHECK BCT VALUES 2–9
Open CE Door flag (UF070) A–7
CYCLE ADVANCED 2–15
DI 00-07 COM ERR 2–9 OPEN DOOR switch 1–5
DI 08-15 COM ERR 2–9 Open RE Door flag (UF074) A–8
DO 00-07 COM ERR 2–9
DO 08-15 COM ERR 2–10 opening
DO 16-23 COM ERR 2–10 manual door 1–8
DOOR SWITCH FAIL 2–10 operating digital outputs manually 3–7, 7–48
DOORS NOT SEALED 2–10
DOORS NOT UNSLD 2–11 optional features
ENTER TO EDIT 2–15 parameter check 6–5
JACKET OVER-TEMP 2–11 utilities control 6–2
JKT RTD ERROR 2–11
LEAK TEST FAIL 2–12 P
LOW CYCLE VALUES 2–15
LOW POWER BROWN OUT 2–15, 3–14
P01 thru P22 flags (SF064 thru SF087) A–2
MANUAL MODE 2–16
POWER FAILED 2–12 PANEL 1 ERROR flag (SF001) A–1
PRESS ERROR 2–12
PANEL 2 ERROR flag (SF002) A–1
PRESS IN CHAMBER 2–13
RE DOOR OPEN 2–16 PANEL SETUP screen 7–38
RESET-TEMP LOW 2–13 parameter check feature
UTILITY SHUTDOWN 2–16 description 6–5
WAIT FOR JACKET 2–16 enabling 4–27
WATER IN DRAIN 2–13
PARAMETER SETTINGS access 1–14, 7–15, 7–17
model 433HC
cycle types 1–1 PARAMETER softkey 1–6
factory set parameters 1–1 PASSWORD access 1–14
model 533HC password access levels
cycle types 1–1 BOOLEAN CODE 1–14
factory set parameters 1–1 BOOLEAN PASSWORD 1–14
MORE BUTTONS flag (SF181) A–4 CALENDAR 1–14
CALIBRATION access 1–14
MS250 EXCEEDED flag (SF030) A–2 CONFIGURATION 1–14
Mt CE Seal flag (UF086) A–8 DOCUMENTATION 1–14
PARAMETER SETTINGS 1–14
Mt CE Unseal flag (UF088) A–8
PASSWORD SETUP 1–14
Mt DD-S Seal flag (UF084) A–8 SERVICE 1–14
SYSTEM DEFINITION 1–14
Mt DD-S Unseal flag (UF085) A–8
password entry screen 7–5
Mt RE Seal flag (UF087) A–8

61301609701 I–7
PASSWORD SETUP access 1–14, 7–40 cycle worksheet 1–19
drying recommendations 1–19
passwords
factory settings 1–19
adding user to list 7–41
assigning 7–40 PRINT COM. ERROR flag (SF006) A–1
deleting user from list 7–41
PRINT REALTIME flag (SF167) A–3
entering 7–5
selecting access areas 7–41 printer 1–7
log interval 7–29
PASSWORDS screen 7–40
log values definition 7–30
PC DISK LOG flag (SF029) A–2 testing 3–14
trouble analysis 3–14
periodic maintenance
cleaning water and steam strainers 5–2 PRINTER BUSY flag (SF166) A–3
cleaning water solenoid valve 5–2
PRINTER screen 7–29
every six months 5–2
every three months 5–2 PRINTOUT CYCLE screen 7–28
monthly 5–2 Process Alarm flag (UF108) A–9
periodic maintenance schedule PROCESS COMPLETE indicator 1–6
sterilizer 5–2
Process Failure flag (UF000) A–5
PHS ADV softkey 1–11
PROCESS FAILURE indicator 1–6, 2–3
piping package
400/500 series 8–2 process screen
BAR GRAPH 1–6
piping system maintenance DETAILS 1–6
checking pressure relief valves 5–19 PLOT GRAPH 1–6
PIT EXCEEDED flag (SF016) A–1 selecting default 7–10
PLOT GRAPH screen 1–6, 7–11 program listing, printing 7–28
P-meters Low flag (UF114) A–9 Prt Actual Time flag (UF115) A–9
power box (1A)
electrical schematic 9–7 Q
wiring diagram 9–3
POWER FAILED message 2–12 quick edit mode
editing parameters 7–15
PRESS ERROR message 2–12 selecting 7–39
PRESS IN CHAMBER message 2–13 quick edit screen 7–15
pressure meter specification 4–40
pressure relief valves, checking 5–19 R
pressure switch adjustment 4–28
rack and shelves 1–13
pressure transducer
bridge compensation table 5–8, 5–9 RE DOOR OPEN message 2–16
calibration 4–8 Reached Neg Pul flag (UF041) A–6
data card 5–8
entering data from card 5–8 replacing battery
replacing 5–5 control board 2–7
replacing resistor set 5–7 RESET-TEMP LOW message 2–13
resistor set 5–7
roughing-in drawing
pressure transducer calibration 400/500 series 10–2
high reference value 4–11, 4–15 water treatment system 10–18
low reference value 4–10, 4–14 water-saver 10–18
special tools 4–8, 4–13
RS232 COM. ERROR flag (SF003) A–1
pressure unit, selecting 7–37
RS232 MASTER flag (SF013) A–1
prevacuum cycle (HC)
cycle parameters 1–19 RTD Buf TI Cmplt (UF061) A–7

I–8
S door configuration 4–26
printer log interval 7–29
printer log values definition 7–30
S/D Door Closed flag (UF036) A–6
SETUP menu 7–9
SAVE RAM TO FLASH screen 5–10, 7–52
SETUP softkey 1–6
saving RAM to EPROM 5–9, 7–52
ABOUT screen 7–13
SCREEN ON/OFF flag (SF182) A–4 BAR GRAPH screen 7–11
DETAILS screen 7–10
SD Power flag (UF091) A–8
PLOT GRAPH screen 7–10
Seal CE Door flag (UF072) A–7 SYSTEM MENU 7–12
Seal Other Door flag (UF102) A–9 SF000 INT I2C ERROR flag A–1
Seal RE Door flag (UF076) A–8 SF001 PANEL 1 ERROR flag A–1
secondary alarm buzzer, adjusting 4–32 SF002 PANEL 2 ERROR flag A–1
seismic anchorage drawings SF003 RS232 COM. ERROR flag A–1
400 series 10–10, 10–11, 10–12, 10–13
SF006 PRINT COM. ERROR flag A–1
500 series 10–14, 10–15, 10–16, 10–17
SF011 OP21 MASTER FLAG A–1
SELECT CYCLE screen 7–14
SF012 OP22 MASTER flag A–1
SELECT CYCLE softkey 1–6
SF013 RS232 MASTER A–1
selecting
confirm save/cancel 7–39 SF016 PIT EXCEEDED flag A–1
cycle 7–14
SF019 ON OFF FLAG flag A–2
date format 7–36
default edit mode 7–39 SF020 BLANK TEXT flag A–2
default process screen 7–38 SF021 CYCLE EXECUTED A–2
full edit mode 7–39
item from menu 7–4 SF022 START LOG flag A–2
language 7–36 SF023 SLOW LOG flag A–2
parameter edit mode 7–39
pressure unit 7–37 SF024 FAST LOG flag A–2
process screen 7–10 SF025 ALARM PHASE flag A–2
quick edit mode 7–39
screen saver 7–39 SF026 BUZZER flag A–2
setup option 7–7 SF029 PC DISK LOG flag A–2
temperature unit 7–37
SF030 MS250 EXCEEDED flag A–2
SERVICE access 1–14, 4–12, 4–16, 4–24, 5–10, 7–44, 7–46,
SF031 LOG flag A–2
7–47, 7–48, 7–49, 7–50, 7–51, 7–52
SF033 AI. CH 01 ERROR A–2
SERVICE menu 3–2
DIAGNOSTIC menu 7–45 SF033 AI. CH 01 ERROR flag A–2
ERROR LOG screen 7–44
SF034 AI. CH 02 ERROR flag A–2
SERVICE menu screen 7–43
SF035 AI. CH 03 ERROR flag A–2
Set Abort BT flag (UF056) A–7
SF064 thru SF087 P01 thru P22 flags A–2
Set MORE flag (UF055) A–7
SF128 DO MOD. 0 ERROR flag A–3
Set Phs Adv BT flag (UF057) A–7
SF129 DO MOD. 1 ERROR flag A–3
setting
SF136 DI MOD. 0 ERROR flag A–3
alarm clock 7–22
date 7–21 SF137 DI MOD. 1 ERROR flag A–3
time 7–21 SF151 MANUAL MODE SET flag A–3
utilities control OFF time 6–3, 7–22
utilities control ON time 6–3, 7–22 SF162 LOG VAR 1 – 20 flag A–3

setting up SF165 BATTERY LOW flag A–3


display panel 7–38 SF166 PRINTER BUSY flag A–3

61301609701 I–9
SF167 PRINT REALTIME flag A–3 BATTERY LOW (SF165) A–3
BLANK TEXT (SF020) A–2
SF179 CORRECT PROCESS flag A–4
BUZZER (SF026) A–2
SF181 MORE BUTTONS flag A–4 CORRECT PROCESS (SF179) A–4
SF182 SCREEN ON/OFF flag A–4 CYCLE EXECUTED (SF021) A–2
CYCLE SELECTED (SF183) A–4
SF183 CYCLE SELECTED flag A–4 DI MOD. 0 ERROR (SF136) A–3
SLOW LOG flag (SF023) A–2 DI MOD. 1 ERROR (SF137) A–3
DO MOD. 0 ERROR (SF128) A–3
slow log interval 7–29 DO MOD. 1 ERROR (SF129) A–3
softkeys FAST LOG (SF024) A–2
ABORT 1–10 INT I2C ERROR (SF000) A–1
PARAMETERS 7–15 LOG (SF031) A–2
PHS ADV 1–11 LOG VAR 1 – 20 (SF162) A–3
SELECT CYCLE 7–14 MANUAL MODE SET (SF151) A–3
SETUP 7–9 MORE BUTTONS (SF181) A–4
MS250 EXCEEDED (SF030) A–2
software configuration ON OFF FLAG (SF019) A–2
parameter check feature 4–27 OP21 MASTER (SF011) A–1
utilities control feature 4–27 OP22 MASTER (SF012) A–1
special tools P01 thru P22 (SF064 thru SF087) A–2
adapter plugs 4–41 PANEL 1 ERROR (SF001) A–1
combination adapter plug 4–42 PANEL 2 ERROR (SF002) A–1
flash EPROM replacement 5–10 PC DISK LOG (SF029) A–2
pressure meter 4–40 PIT EXCEEDED (SF016) A–1
pressure sensor calibration 4–8, 4–13 PRINT COM. ERROR (SF006) A–1
specifications 4–40 PRINT REALTIME (SF167) A–3
temperature sensor calibration (test plugs) 4–17 PRINTER BUSY (SF166) A–3
temperature test plugs 4–41 RS232 COM. ERROR (SF003) A–1
RS232 MASTER (SF013) A–1
Standby phs flag (UF019) A–5
SCREEN ON/OFF (SF182) A–4
Start Buff TI flag (UF045) A–6 SLOW LOG (SF023) A–2
START LOG (SF022) A–2
Start Buff TI flag UF045 A–6
viewing 3–10
START LOG flag (SF022) A–2
SYSTEM menu 7–12
Start OK flag (UF001) A–5 CALENDAR screen 7–19
Start phs flag (UF017) A–5 CALIBRATION menu 7–20, 7–23
CONFIGURATION menu 7–32
Start RTD Buf TI flag (UF060) A–7 DIPSWITCHES screen 7–42
START switch 1–5 DOCUMENTATION menu 7–27
PASSWORDS screen 7–40
Start TI Fo flag (UF113) A–9 SAVE RAM TO FLASH 7–52
status indicator (printer) 3–14 SERVICE menu 7–43
sterilizer configurations
door types 1–12 T
double door (standard) 1–12
single door 1–12 temperature sensor calibration
sterilizer name, assigning 7–34 chamber RTD 4–18
high reference value 4–20, 4–24
System Alarm flag (UF109) A–9 jacket RTD 4–22
SYSTEM DEFINITION access 1–14 low reference value 4–18, 4–22
special tools 4–17
system flags using test plugs 4–17
AI. CH 01 ERROR A–2
AI. CH 01 ERROR (SF033) A–2 temperature sensor calibration (overview) 4–3
AI. CH 02 ERROR A–2 temperature sensors
AI. CH 03 ERROR (SF035) A–2 insertion depth 5–4
ALARM PHASE (SF025) A–2

I–10
replacing RTDs 5–3 UF025 Liq Exh Too Fast flag A–6
temperature unit, selecting 7–37 UF026 Fo Auto Selected flag A–6
TEST ANALOG IN screen 3–2, 3–5, 7–46 UF027 LoadPb – Config flag A–6
TEST DIGITAL IN screen 3–2, 3–6, 7–47 UF028 Load Probe Instr flag A–6
TEST DIGITAL OUT screen 3–2, 3–7, 7–48 UF029 Liquid Cycle flag A–6
TEST LED/BUZZER screen 3–2 UF030 Liq Lev – 1sec flag A–6
test plugs 4–18 UF031 Liq Lev – 6sec flag A–6
TEST PRINTER screen 3–2 UF032 Liq Lev – 11sec flag A–6
TEST SYSTEM FLAG screen 3–2, 3–10, 7–50 UF033 Fault non cyc/dr flag A–6
TEST USER FLAG screen 3–2, 3–11, 7–49 UF035 D/D Doors Closed flag A–6
testing UF036 S/D Door Closed flag A–6
buzzer 7–51
UF038 Gravity Dry Jump flag A–6
LEDs 7–51
printer 7–51 UF039 Chmbr TmpLow Blk flag A–6
Text on scrn -usd flag (UF117) A–9 UF040 Chk for Temp Low flag A–6
time of day, setting 7–21 UF041 Reached Neg Pul flag A–6
Timer Started flag (UF066) A–7 UF043 Dr Sw Fail T/O flag A–6
transfer carriage 1–13 UF044 Buff TI Complete flag A–6
trouble analysis UF046 WS - Config A–6
control system 3–12 UF047 Unit – 800 flag A–6, A–7
door 3–12
printer 3–14 UF052 Vac Pmp – Config flag A–7
UF053 Jkt Byps Config flag A–7
U UF054 Already Jumped flag A–7
UF055 Set MORE flag A–7
UF000 Process Failure flag A–5
UF056 Set Abort BT flag A–7
UF001 Start OK flag A–5
UF057 Set Phs Adv BT flag A–7
UF002 Door Unseal OK flag A–5
UF059 Cycle Aborted flag A–7
UF004 In Progress flag A–5
UF060 Start RTD Buf TI flag A–7
UF005 Cycle Good flag A–5
UF061 RTD Buf TI Complt flag A–7
UF006 Always True Flag flag A–5
UF062 Manual Abort Act flag A–7
UF007 Uni RE-Enabled flag A–5
UF065 At Temp flag A–7
UF008 UniCE unsld Last flag A–5
UF066 Timer Started flag A–7
UF009 UniRE unsld Last flag A–5
UF069 Fault in cyc/dr flag A–7
UF010 Negative Pulse 1 flag A–5
UF070 Open CE Door flag A–7
UF011 Negative Pulse 2 flag A–5
UF071 Close CE Door flag A–7
UF012 Chamber Temp Low flag A–5
UF072 Seal CE Door flag A–7
UF014 Clear Pressed flag A–5
UF073 Unseal CE Door flag A–8
UF016 Loss of Dr Sw flag A–5
UF074 Open RE Door flag A–8
UF017 Start phs flag A–5
UF075 Close RE Door flag A–8
UF019 Standby phs flag A–5
UF076 Seal RE Door flag A–8
UF020 Cycle Complete flag A–5
UF077 Unseal RE Door flag A–8
UF024 End Liq Exh flag A–6

61301609701 I–11
UF079 Exp Dropout flag A–8 Alarm Silence (UF110) A–9
Already Jumped (UF054) A–7
UF080 Liq Exp Droput flag A–8
Always True Flag (UF006) A–5
UF083 Jkt<= 126.6 liq flag> A–8 At Temp (UF065) A–7
UF084 Mt DD-S Seal flag A–8 Buff TI Complete (UF044) A–6
CC Print TOD (UF107) A–9
UF085 Mt DD-S Unseal flag A–8 Chamber Temp Low (UF102) A–5
UF086 Mt CE Seal flag A–8 Chk for Temp Low (UF040) A–6
Chmbr TmpLow Blk (UF039) A–6
UF087 Mt RE Seal flag A–8 Clear Pressed (UF014) A–5
UF088 Mt CE Unseal flag A–8 Close CE Door (UF071) A–7
Close RE Door (UF075) A–8
UF089 Mt RE Unseal flag A–8 Controls Off (UF116) A–9
UF091 SD Power flag A–8 Cycle Aborted (UF059) A–7
Cycle Complete (UF020) A–5
UF093 DD P-Standard flag A–9
Cycle Good (UF005) A–5
UF095 DD P-Unidirect flag A–9 D/D Doors Closed (UF035) A–6
DD P-Interlock (UF097) A–9
UF097 DD P-Interlock flag A–9
DD P-Standard (UF093) A–9
UF102 Seal Other Door flag A–9 DD P-Unidirect (UF095) A–9
UF106 Alarm Enable flag A–9 Door Unseal OK (UF002) A–5
Dr Sw Fail T/O (UF043) A–6
UF107 CC Print TOD flag A–9 End Liq Exh (UF024) A–6
UF108 Process Alarm flag A–9 Exp Dropout (UF079) A–8
Fault in cyc/dr (UF069) A–7
UF109 System Alarm flag A–9 Fault non cyc/dr (UF033) A–6
UF110 Alarm Silence flag A–9 Fo Auto Selected (UF026) A–6
Gravity Dry Jump (UF038) A–6
UF113 Start TI Fo flag A–9 In Progress (UF004) A–5
UF114 P-meters Low flag A–9 Jkt A–8
Jkt Byps Config (UF053) A–7
UF115 Prt Actual Time flag A–9
Liq Exh Too Fast (UF025) A–6
UF116 Controls Off flag A–9 Liq Exp Droput (UF080) A–8
Liq Lev – 11sec (UF032) A–6
UF117 Text on scrn -usd flag A–9
Liq Lev – 1sec (UF030) A–6
UF118 Utility Shutdown flag A–9 Liq Lev – 6sec (UF031) A–6
UF119 Manual Phs Adv flag A–9 Liquid Cycle (UF029) A–6
Load Probe Instr (UF028) A–6
UF123 Man Phs Adv Code flag A–10 LoadPb – Config (UF027) A–6
UF126 USD Pause flag A–10 Loss of Dr Sw (UF016) A–5
Man Phs Adv Code (UF123) A–10
Uni RE-Enabled flag (UF007) A–5 Manual Abort Act (UF062) A–7
UniCE unsld Last flag (UF008) A–5 Manual Phs Adv A–9
Manual Phs Adv (UF119) A–9
UniRE unsld Last flag (UF009) A–5 Mt CE Seal (UF086) A–8
Unit – 800 flag (UF047) A–6, A–7 Mt CE Unseal (UF088) A–8
Mt DD-S Seal (UF084) A–8
Unseal CE Door flag (UF073) A–8
Mt DD-S Unseal (UF085) A–8
Unseal RE Door flag (UF077) A–8 Mt RE Seal (UF087) A–8
Mt RE Unseal (UF089) A–8
UNSEAL softkey 1–6
Negative Pulse 1 (UF010) A–5
UP ARROW softkey 1–5 Negative Pulse 2 (UF011) A–5
USD – Config flag (UF051) A–7 Open CE Door (UF070) A–7
Open RE Door (UF074) A–8
USD – Config flag UF051 A–7 P-meters Low (UF114) A–9
USD Pause flag (UF126) A–10 Process Alarm (UF108) A–9
Process Failure (UF000) A–5
user flags Prt Actual Time (UF115) A–9
Alarm Enable (UF106) A–9 Reached Neg Pul (UF041) A–6

I–12
RTD Buf TI Cmplt (UF061) A–7 vacuum leak test
S/D Door Closed (UF036) A–6 (HC) 1–20
SD Power (UF091) A–8
vacuum pump
Seal CE Door (UF072) A–7
trouble analysis 6–1
Seal Other Door (UF102) A–9
Seal RE Door (UF076) A–8 verifying
Set Abort BT (UF056) A–7 pressure 4–5
Set MORE (UF055) A–7 temperature 4–5
Set Phs Adv BT (UF057) A–7 VIEW PARAMETERS screen (full edit) 7–17
Standby phs (UF019) A–5
Start Buff TI (UF045) A–6 VIEW PARAMETERS screen (quick edit) 7–15
Start OK (UF001) A–5 viewing
Start phs (U017) A–5 analog inputs 3–5, 7–46
Start RTD Buf TI (UF060) A–7 digital inputs 3–6, 7–47
Start TI Fo (UF113) A–9 digital outputs 7–48
System Alarm (UF109) A–9 error log 3–3, 7–44
Text on scrn -usd (UF117) A–9 system flags 3–10, 7–50
Timer Started (UF066) A–7 user flags 3–11, 7–49
Uni RE-Enabled (UF007) A–5
UniCE unsld Last (UF008) A–5
UniRE unsld Last (UF009) A–5 W
Unit – 800 (UF047) A–6, A–7
Unseal CE Door (UF073) A–8 WAIT FOR JACKET message 2–16
Unseal RE Door (UF077) A–8
WATER IN DRAIN message 2–13
USD – Config (UF051) A–7
USD Pause (UF126) A–10 water treatment system
Utility Shutdown (UF118) A–9 roughing-in drawing 10–18
Vac Pmp – Config (UF052) A–7
water-saver
viewing 3–11
roughing-in drawing 10–18
WS - Config (UF046) A–6
wiring diagrams
using temperature test plugs 4–42
control box (2A) 9–4
utilities control feature power box (1A) 9–3
description 6–2 system 9–2
enabling 4–27
worksheets (HC)
setting on and off times 6–3
flash 10+ cycle 1–17
Utility Shutdown flag (UF118) A–9 flash 3+ cycle 1–16
gravity cycle 1–15
UTILITY SHUTDOWN message 2–16
leak test cycle 1–20
liquids cycle 1–18
V prevacuum cycle 1–19
WS - Config (UF046) A–6
Vac Pmp – Config flag (UF052) A–7

61301609701 I–13
I–14

You might also like